ATTINY25-15ST1 [MICROCHIP]

IC MCU 8BIT 2KB FLASH 8SOIC;
ATTINY25-15ST1
型号: ATTINY25-15ST1
厂家: MICROCHIP    MICROCHIP
描述:

IC MCU 8BIT 2KB FLASH 8SOIC

时钟 ATM 异步传输模式 PC 微控制器 光电二极管 外围集成电路 闪存
文件: 总177页 (文件大小:5326K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive  
8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System  
Programmable Flash  
DATASHEET  
Features  
High performance, low power AVR® 8-bit microcontroller  
Advanced RISC architecture  
120 powerful instructions – most single clock cycle execution  
32 × 8 general purpose working registers  
Fully static operation  
Non-volatile program and data memories  
2/4/8Kbyte of in-system programmable program memory flash (ATtiny25/45/85)  
Endurance: 10,000 write/erase cycles  
128/256/512 bytes in-system programmable EEPROM (Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85)  
Endurance: 100,000 write/erase cycles  
128/256/512 bytes internal SRAM (ATtiny25/45/85)  
Programming lock for self-programming flash program and EEPROM data  
security  
Peripheral features  
8-bit Timer/Counter with prescaler and Two PWM channels  
8-bit high speed Timer/Counter with separate prescaler  
2 High frequency PWM outputs with separate output compare registers  
Programmable dead time generator  
Universal serial interface with start condition detector  
10-bit ADC  
4 Single ended channels  
2 Differential ADC channel pairs with programmable gain (1x, 20x)  
Programmable watchdog timer with separate on-chip oscillator  
On-chip analog comparator  
Special microcontroller features  
debugWIRE on-chip debug system  
In-system programmable via SPI port  
External and internal interrupt sources  
Low power idle, ADC noise reduction, and power-down modes  
Enhanced power-on reset circuit  
Programmable brown-out detection circuit  
Internal calibrated oscillator  
7598J-AVR-12/14  
I/O and packages  
Six programmable I/O lines  
8-pin SOIC  
20-pin QFN  
Operating voltage  
2.7 – 5.5V for Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85  
Speed grade  
ATtiny25/45/85: 0 to 8MHz at 2.7 to 5.5V, 0 – 16MHz at 4.5 to 5.5V  
Automotive temperature range  
–40°C to +125°C  
Low Power Consumption  
Active mode:  
1MHz, 2.7V: 300µA  
Power-down mode:  
0.2µA at 2.7V  
Pin Configurations  
Figure 1.  
Pinout ATtiny25/45/85  
SOIC  
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5  
(PCINT3/XTAL1/OC1B/ADC3) PB3  
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
VCC  
PB2 (SCK/USCK/SCL/ADC1/T0/INT0/PCINT2)  
PB1 (MISO/DO/AIN1/OC0B/OC1A/PCINT1)  
PB0 (MOSI/DI/SDA/AIN0/OC0A/OC1A/AREF/PCINT0)  
(PCINT4/XTAL2/CLKO/OC1B/ADC2) PB4  
GND  
QFN/MLF  
20 19 18 17 16  
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5  
1
2
3
4
5
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
VCC  
(PCINT3/XTAL1/CLK/OC1B/ADC3) PB3  
PB2 (SCK/USCK/SCL/ADC1/T0/INT0/PCINT2)  
DNC  
DNC  
DNC  
PB1 (MISO/DO/AIN1/OC0B/OC1A/PCINT1)  
PB0 (MOSI/DI/SDA/AIN0/OC0A/OC1A/AREF/PCINT0)  
(PCINT4/XTAL2/CLKO/OC1B/ADC2) PB4  
6
7
8
9
10  
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground  
DNC: Do Not Connect  
2
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
1.  
Overview  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR® enhanced RISC architecture. By  
executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATtiny25/45/85 achieves throughputs approaching 1MIPS per  
MHz allowing the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.  
1.1  
Block Diagram  
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram  
8-bit Databus  
Calibrated  
Internal  
Oscillator  
Program  
Counter  
Stack  
Watchdog  
Timer  
Timing and  
Control  
VCC  
GND  
Pointer  
MCU Control  
Register  
Program  
Flash  
SRAM  
MCU Status  
Register  
Instruction  
Register  
General  
Purpose  
Registers  
Timer/  
Counter 0  
X
Y
Z
Instruction  
Decoder  
Timer/  
Counter 1  
Control  
Lines  
ALU  
Universal  
Serial  
Interface  
Status  
Register  
Interrupt  
Unit  
Programming  
Logic  
Data  
EEPROM  
Oscillators  
Data Register  
Port B  
Data Dir. Register  
Port B  
ADC/  
Analog Comparator  
Port B Drivers  
Reset  
PB0-PB5  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
3
7598J–AVR–12/14  
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the 32 registers are directly  
connected to the arithmetic logic unit (ALU), allowing two independent registers to be accessed in one single instruction  
executed in one clock cycle. The resulting architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times  
faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers.  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 provides the following features: 2/4/8K byte of in-system programmable flash, 128/256/512 bytes  
EEPROM, 128/256/256 bytes SRAM, 6 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, one 8-bit  
Timer/Counter with compare modes, one 8-bit high speed Timer/Counter, universal serial interface, internal and external  
interrupts, a 4-channel, 10-bit ADC, a programmable watchdog timer with internal oscillator, and three software selectable  
power saving modes. The idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counter, ADC, analog comparator, and  
interrupt system to continue functioning. The power-down mode saves the register contents, disabling all chip functions until  
the next interrupt or hardware reset. The ADC noise reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules except ADC, to  
minimize switching noise during ADC conversions.  
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The on-chip ISP flash allows the  
program memory to be re-programmed in-system through an SPI serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory  
programmer or by an on-chip boot code running on the AVR core.  
The ATtiny25/45/85 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools including: C compilers,  
macro assemblers, program debugger/simulators, in-circuit emulators, and evaluation kits.  
1.2  
Automotive Quality Grade  
The ATtiny25/45/85 have been developed and manufactured according to the most stringent requirements of the  
international standard ISO-TS-16949. This data sheet contains limit values extracted from the results of extensive  
characterization (temperature and voltage). The quality and reliability of the ATtiny25/45/85 have been verified during  
regular product qualification as per AEC-Q100 grade 1.  
As indicated in the ordering information paragraph, the products are available in three different temperature grades, but with  
equivalent quality and reliability objectives. Different temperature identifiers have been defined as listed in Table 1-1.  
Table 1-1. Temperature Grade Identification for Automotive Products  
Temperature  
–40; +85  
Temperature Identifier  
Comments  
T
T1  
Z
Similar to industrial temperature grade but with automotive quality  
Reduced automotive temperature range  
–40; +105  
–40; +125  
Full automotive temperature range  
1.3  
Pin Descriptions  
1.3.1 VCC  
Supply voltage.  
1.3.2 GND  
Ground.  
1.3.3 Port B (PB5..PB0)  
Port B is a 6-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The port B output buffers have  
symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled  
low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes  
active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 as listed on Section 9.3.2 “Alternate  
Functions of Port B” on page 50.  
1.3.4 RESET  
Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a reset, even if the clock is not  
running. The minimum pulse length is given in Table on page 34. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset.  
4
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
2.  
About Code Examples  
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of the device. These code  
examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors  
include bit definitions in the header files and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C  
compiler documentation for more details.  
3.  
AVR CPU Core  
3.1  
Introduction  
This section discusses the AVR® core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core is to ensure correct  
program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories, perform calculations, control peripherals, and  
handle interrupts.  
3.2  
Architectural Overview  
Figure 3-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture  
Data Bus 8-bit  
Program  
Counter  
Status and  
Control  
Flash  
Program  
Memory  
32 x 8  
General  
Purpose  
Registers  
Instruction  
Register  
Interrupt  
Unit  
Watchdog  
Timer  
Instruction  
Decoder  
ALU  
Analog  
Comparator  
Control Lines  
I/O Module 1  
I/O Module 2  
I/O Module n  
Data  
SRAM  
EEPROM  
I/O Lines  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
5
7598J–AVR–12/14  
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR® uses a harvard architecture – with separate memories and  
buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are executed with a single level pipelining. While one  
instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions  
to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is in-system reprogrammable flash memory.  
The fast-access register file contains 32 × 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single clock cycle access time. This  
allows single-cycle arithmetic logic unit (ALU) operation. In a typical ALU operation, two operands are output from the  
register file, the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the register file – in one clock cycle.  
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for data space addressing – enabling  
efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in  
flash program memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section.  
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and a register. Single register  
operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation, the status register is updated to reflect  
information about the result of the operation.  
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to directly address the whole  
address space. Most AVR instructions are 16-bits wide. There are also 32-bit instructions.  
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address program counter (PC) is stored on the stack. The stack is  
effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the stack size is only limited by the total SRAM size and  
the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP in the reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are  
executed). The stack pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed through  
the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.  
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.  
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional global interrupt enable bit in the status  
register. All interrupts have a separate interrupt vector in the interrupt vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance  
with their interrupt vector position. The lower the interrupt vector address, the higher the priority.  
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as control registers, SPI, and other I/O functions.  
The I/O memory can be accessed directly, or as the data space locations following those of the register file, 0x20 – 0x5F.  
3.3  
3.4  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit  
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose working registers. Within a  
single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose registers or between a register and an immediate are  
executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some  
implementations of the architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication and  
fractional format. See the “instruction set” section for a detailed description.  
Status Register  
The status register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic instruction. This  
information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform conditional operations. Note that the status register is  
updated after all ALU operations, as specified in the instruction set reference. This will in many cases remove the need for  
using the dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.  
The status register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning from an  
interrupt. This must be handled by software.  
The AVR status register – SREG – is defined as  
:
Bit  
7
I
6
T
5
H
4
S
3
V
2
N
1
Z
0
C
SREG  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
6
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable  
The global interrupt enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt enable control is then  
performed in separate control registers. If the global interrupt enable register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled  
independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is  
set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by the application with the  
SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.  
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage  
The bit copy instructions BLD (bit LoaD) and BST (bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination for the operated bit. A bit  
from a register in the register file can be copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a  
register in the register file by the BLD instruction.  
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag  
The half carry flag H indicates a half carry in some arithmetic operations. Half carry is useful in BCD arithmetic. See the  
“instruction set description” for detailed information.  
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N  
V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the negative flag N and the two’s complement overflow flag V. See the  
“instruction set description” for detailed information.  
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag  
The two’s complement overflow flag V supports two’s complement arithmetic. See the “instruction set description” for  
detailed information.  
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag  
The negative flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “instruction set description” for  
detailed information.  
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag  
The zero flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “instruction set description” for detailed  
information.  
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag  
The carry flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “instruction set description” for detailed  
information.  
3.5  
General Purpose Register File  
The register file is optimized for the AVR enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the required performance and  
flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the register file:  
One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input  
Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input  
Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input  
One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Figure 3-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.  
Figure 3-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers  
7
0
Addr.  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
R0  
R1  
R2  
R13  
R14  
R15  
R16  
R17  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
0x10  
0x11  
General  
Purpose  
Working  
Registers  
R26  
R27  
R28  
R29  
R30  
R31  
0x1A  
0x1B  
0x1C  
0x1D  
0x1E  
0x1F  
X-register low byte  
X-register high byte  
Y-register low byte  
Y-register high byte  
Z-register low byte  
Z-register high byte  
Most of the instructions operating on the register file have direct access to all registers, and most of them are single cycle  
instructions.  
As shown in Figure 3-2, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them directly into the first 32  
locations of the user data space. Although not being physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization  
provides great flexibility in access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the  
file.  
3.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register  
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers are 16-bit address  
pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described  
in Figure 3-3.  
Figure 3-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers  
15  
7
XH  
0
XL  
7
0
0
X-register  
R27 (0x1B)  
R26 (0x1A)  
15  
7
YH  
0
YL  
7
0
0
Y-register  
Z-register  
R29 (0x1D)  
R31 (0x1F)  
R28 (0x1C)  
R30 (0x1E)  
15  
7
ZH  
0
ZL  
7
0
0
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement, automatic increment, and  
automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).  
8
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
3.6  
Stack Pointer  
The stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing return addresses after  
interrupts and subroutine calls. The stack pointer register always points to the top of the stack. Note that the stack is  
implemented as growing from higher memory locations to lower memory locations. This implies that a stack PUSH command  
decreases the stack pointer.  
The stack pointer points to the data SRAM stack area where the subroutine and interrupt stacks are located. This stack  
space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled.  
The stack pointer must be set to point above 0x60. The stack pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the  
stack with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two when the return address is pushed onto the stack with  
subroutine call or interrupt. The stack pointer is incremented by one when data is popped from the stack with the POP  
instruction, and it is incremented by two when data is popped from the stack with return from subroutine RET or return from  
interrupt RETI.  
The AVR stack pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is  
implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations of the AVR architecture is so small that only  
SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH register will not be present.  
Bit  
15  
SP15  
SP7  
7
14  
SP14  
SP6  
6
13  
SP13  
SP5  
5
12  
SP12  
SP4  
4
11  
SP11  
SP3  
3
10  
SP10  
SP2  
2
9
SP9  
SP1  
1
8
SP8  
SP0  
0
SPH  
SPL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
3.7  
Instruction Execution Timing  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR® CPU is driven by the CPU  
clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the chip. No internal clock division is used.  
Figure 3-4 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the harvard architecture and the fast  
access register file concept. This is the basic pipelining concept to obtain up to 1MIPS per MHz with the corresponding  
unique results for functions per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.  
Figure 3-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
clkCPU  
1st Instruction Fetch  
1st Instruction Execute  
2nd Instruction Fetch  
2nd Instruction Execute  
3rd Instruction Fetch  
3rd Instruction Execute  
4th Instruction Fetch  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
9
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
Figure 3-5 shows the internal timing concept for the register file. In a single clock cycle an ALU operation using two register  
operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination register.  
Figure 3-5. Single Cycle ALU Operation  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
clkCPU  
Total Execution Time  
Register Operands Fetch  
ALU Operation Execute  
Result Write Back  
3.8  
Reset and Interrupt Handling  
The AVR® provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate reset vector each have a separate  
program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic  
one together with the global interrupt enable bit in the status register in order to enable the interrupt.  
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the reset and interrupt vectors. The complete  
list of vectors is shown in Section 8. “Interrupts” on page 42. The list also determines the priority levels of the different  
interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the  
external interrupt request 0.  
When an interrupt occurs, the global interrupt enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled. The user software can  
write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine.  
The I-bit is automatically set when a return from interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.  
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the interrupt flag. For these  
interrupts, the program counter is vectored to the actual interrupt vector in order to execute the interrupt handling routine,  
and hardware clears the corresponding interrupt flag. Interrupt flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit  
position(s) to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared, the interrupt  
flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more  
interrupt conditions occur while the global interrupt enable bit is cleared, the corresponding interrupt flag(s) will be set and  
remembered until the global interrupt enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.  
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These interrupts do not necessarily  
have interrupt flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.  
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction before any  
pending interrupt is served.  
Note that the status register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor restored when returning from  
an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.  
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled. No interrupt will be executed  
after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can  
be used to avoid interrupts during the timed EEPROM write sequence.  
10  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Assembly Code Example  
in  
r16, SREG  
; store SREG value  
; disable interrupts during timed sequence  
EECR, EEMWE ; start EEPROM write  
EECR, EEWE  
cli  
sbi  
sbi  
out  
SREG, r16  
; restore SREG value (I-bit)  
C Code Example  
char cSREG;  
cSREG = SREG;  
/* store SREG value */  
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */  
_CLI();  
EECR |= (1<<EEMWE); /* start EEPROM write */  
EECR |= (1<<EEWE);  
SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */  
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed before any pending  
interrupts, as shown in this example.  
Assembly Code Example  
sei  
; set Global Interrupt Enable  
sleep ; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt  
; note: will enter sleep before any pending  
; interrupt(s)  
C Code Example  
_SEI(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */  
_SLEEP(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */  
/* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */  
3.8.1 Interrupt Response Time  
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR® interrupts is four clock cycles minimum. After four clock cycles the  
program vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the program  
counter is pushed onto the stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock  
cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed before the interrupt is  
served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt execution response time is increased by four  
clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the start-up time from the selected sleep mode.  
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock cycles, the program counter (two  
bytes) is popped back from the stack, the stack pointer is incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
11  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
4.  
AVR ATtiny25/45/85 Memories  
This section describes the different memories in the ATtiny25/45/85. The AVR architecture has two main memory spaces,  
the data memory and the program memory space. In addition, the ATtiny25/45/85 features an EEPROM memory for data  
storage. All three memory spaces are linear and regular.  
4.1  
In-System Re-programmable Flash Program Memory  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 contains 2/4/8K byte on-chip in-system reprogrammable flash memory for program storage.  
Since all AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the flash is organized as 1024/2048/4096 × 16.  
The flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The ATtiny25/45/85 program counter (PC) is  
10/11/12 bits wide, thus addressing the 1024/2048/4096 program memory locations. Section 20. “Memory Programming” on  
page 123 contains a detailed description on flash data serial downloading using the SPI pins.  
Constant tables can be allocated within the entire program memory address space (see the LPM – load program memory  
instruction description).  
Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in Section 3.7 “Instruction Execution Timing” on page 9.  
Figure 4-1. Program Memory Map  
Program Memory  
0x0000  
0x03FF/0x07FF  
4.2  
SRAM Data Memory  
Figure 4-2 on page 13 shows how the ATtiny25/45/85 SRAM memory is organized.  
The lower 224/352/607 data memory locations address both the register file, the I/O memory and the internal data SRAM.  
The first 32 locations address the register file, the next 64 locations the standard I/O memory, and the last 128/256/512  
locations address the internal data SRAM.  
The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, indirect with displacement, indirect, indirect with  
pre-decrement, and indirect with post-increment. In the register file, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing  
pointer registers.  
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.  
The indirect with displacement mode reaches 63 address locations from the base address given by the Y- or Z-register.  
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-increment, the address registers X,  
Y, and Z are decremented or incremented.  
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O registers, and the 128/256/512 bytes of internal data SRAM in the  
ATtiny25/45/85 are all accessible through all these addressing modes. The register file is described in Section 3.5 “General  
Purpose Register File” on page 7.  
12  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 4-2. Data Memory Map  
Data Memory  
32 Registers  
64 I/O Registers  
0x0000 - 0x001F  
0x0020 - 0x005F  
0x0060  
Internal SRAM  
(128/256/512 x 8)  
0x0DF/0x015F/0x025F  
4.2.1 Data Memory Access Times  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The internal data SRAM access is  
performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in Figure 4-3.  
Figure 4-3. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles  
T1  
T2  
T3  
clkCPU  
Address  
Data  
Compute Address  
Address valid  
Write  
Read  
WR  
Data  
RD  
Memory Access Instruction  
Next Instruction  
4.3  
EEPROM Data Memory  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 contains 128/256/512 bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a separate data space,  
in which single bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The  
access between the EEPROM and the CPU is described in the following, specifying the EEPROM address registers, the  
EEPROM data register, and the EEPROM control register. For a detailed description of serial data downloading to the  
EEPROM, see Section 20.6 “Serial Downloading” on page 126.  
4.3.1 EEPROM Read/Write Access  
The EEPROM access registers are accessible in the I/O space.  
The write access times for the EEPROM are given in Table 4-1 on page 15. A self-timing function, however, lets the user  
software detect when the next byte can be written. If the user code contains instructions that write the EEPROM, some  
precautions must be taken. In heavily filtered power supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-up/down. This  
causes the device for some period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock frequency used.  
See Section 4.3.10 “Preventing EEPROM Corruption” on page 17 for details on how to avoid problems in these situations.  
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed. Refer to Section 4.3.6  
“Atomic Byte Programming” on page 15 and Section 4.3.7 “Split Byte Programming” on page 15 for details on this.  
When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is executed. When the  
EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
13  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
4.3.2 EEPROM Address Register High – EEARH  
Bit  
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
-
1
-
0
EEAR8  
R/W  
X
EEARH  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
X
R
X
R
X
R
X
R
X
R
X
R
X
• Bit 7..1 – Res6..0: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved for future use and will always read as 0 in ATtiny25/45/85.  
• Bits 0 – EEAR8: EEPROM Address  
The EEPROM address register – EEARH – specifies the high EEPROM address in the 128/256/512 bytes EEPROM space.  
The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 127/255/511. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A  
proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be accessed.  
4.3.3 EEPROM Address Register – EEARL  
Bit  
7
6
5
EEAR5  
R/W  
X
4
EEAR4  
R/W  
X
3
EEAR3  
R/W  
X
2
EEAR2  
R/W  
X
1
EEAR1  
R/W  
X
0
EEAR0  
R/W  
X
EEAR7  
EEAR6  
EEARL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
X
R
X
• Bits 7..0 – EEAR7..0: EEPROM Address  
The EEPROM address register – EEARL – specifies the low EEPROM address in the 128/256/512 bytes EEPROM space.  
The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 127/255/511. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A  
proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be accessed.  
4.3.4 EEPROM Data Register – EEDR  
Bit  
7
EEDR7  
R/W  
X
6
EEDR6  
R/W  
X
5
EEDR5  
R/W  
X
4
EEDR4  
R/W  
X
3
EEDR3  
R/W  
X
2
EEDR2  
R/W  
X
1
EEDR1  
R/W  
X
0
EEDR0  
R/W  
X
EEDR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bits 7..0 – EEDR7..0: EEPROM Data  
For the EEPROM write operation the EEDR register contains the data to be written to the EEPROM in the address given by  
the EEAR register. For the EEPROM read operation, the EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address  
given by EEAR.  
4.3.5 EEPROM Control Register – EECR  
Bit  
7
6
5
EEPM1  
R/W  
X
4
EEPM0  
R/W  
X
3
EERIE  
R/W  
0
2
EEMPE  
R/W  
0
1
EEPE  
R/W  
X
0
EERE  
R/W  
0
EECR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved for future use and will always read as 0 in ATtiny25/45/85. For compatibility with future AVR® devices,  
always write this bit to zero. After reading, mask out this bit.  
• Bit 6 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
14  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
 
• Bits 5, 4 – EEPM1 and EEPM0: EEPROM Programming Mode Bits  
The EEPROM programming mode bits setting defines which programming action that will be triggered when writing EEPE. It  
is possible to program data in one atomic operation (erase the old value and program the new value) or to split the erase and  
Write operations in two different operations. The programming times for the different modes are shown in Table 4-1. While  
EEPE is set, any write to EEPMn will be ignored. During reset, the EEPMn bits will be reset to 0b00 unless the EEPROM is  
busy programming.  
Table 4-1. EEPROM Mode Bits  
EEPM1  
EEPM0  
Programming Time Operation  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
3.4ms  
1.8ms  
1.8ms  
Erase and write in one operation (atomic operation)  
Erase only  
Write only  
Reserved for future use  
• Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable  
Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM ready interrupt if the I-bit in SREG is set. Writing EERIE to zero disables the  
interrupt. The EEPROM ready interrupt generates a constant interrupt when non-volatile memory is ready for programming.  
• Bit 2 – EEMPE: EEPROM Master Program Enable  
The EEMPE bit determines whether writing EEPE to one will have effect or not.  
When EEMPE is set, setting EEPE within four clock cycles will program the EEPROM at the selected address. If EEMPE is  
zero, setting EEPE will have no effect. When EEMPE has been written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero  
after four clock cycles.  
• Bit 1 – EEPE: EEPROM Program Enable  
The EEPROM Program Enable Signal EEPE is the programming enable signal to the EEPROM. When EEPE is written, the  
EEPROM will be programmed according to the EEPMn bits setting. The EEMPE bit must be written to one before a logical  
one is written to EEPE, otherwise no EEPROM write takes place. When the write access time has elapsed, the EEPE bit is  
cleared by hardware. When EEPE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
• Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable  
The EEPROM read enable signal – EERE – is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the correct address is set up in the  
EEAR register, the EERE bit must be written to one to trigger the EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one  
instruction, and the requested data is available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four cycles  
before the next instruction is executed. The user should poll the EEPE bit before starting the read operation. If a write  
operation is in progress, it is neither possible to read the EEPROM, nor to change the EEAR register.  
4.3.6 Atomic Byte Programming  
Using atomic byte programming is the simplest mode. When writing a byte to the EEPROM, the user must write the address  
into the EEAR register and data into EEDR register. If the EEPMn bits are zero, writing EEPE (within four cycles after  
EEMPE is written) will trigger the erase/write operation. Both the erase and write cycle are done in one operation and the  
total programming time is given in Table 19-1 on page 122. The EEPE bit remains set until the erase and write operations  
are completed. While the device is busy with programming, it is not possible to do any other EEPROM operations.  
4.3.7 Split Byte Programming  
It is possible to split the erase and write cycle in two different operations. This may be useful if the system requires short  
access time for some limited period of time (typically if the power supply voltage falls). In order to take advantage of this  
method, it is required that the locations to be written have been erased before the write operation. But since the erase and  
write operations are split, it is possible to do the erase operations when the system allows doing time-critical operations  
(typically after Power-up).  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
15  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
4.3.8 Erase  
To erase a byte, the address must be written to EEAR. If the EEPMn bits are 0b01, writing the EEPE (within four cycles after  
EEMPE is written) will trigger the erase operation only (programming time is given in Table 19-1 on page 122). The EEPE bit  
remains set until the erase operation completes. While the device is busy programming, it is not possible to do any other  
EEPROM operations.  
4.3.9 Write  
To write a location, the user must write the address into EEAR and the data into EEDR. If the EEPMn bits are 0b10, writing  
the EEPE (within four cycles after EEMPE is written) will trigger the write operation only (programming time is given in  
Table 19-1 on page 122). The EEPE bit remains set until the write operation completes. If the location to be written has not  
been erased before write, the data that is stored must be considered as lost. While the device is busy with programming, it is  
not possible to do any other EEPROM operations.  
The calibrated oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. Make sure the oscillator frequency is within the  
requirements described in Section 5.6.1 “Oscillator Calibration Register – OSCCAL” on page 24.  
The following code examples show one assembly and one C function for erase, write, or atomic write of the EEPROM. The  
examples assume that interrupts are controlled (e.g., by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during  
execution of these functions  
Assembly Code Example  
EEPROM_write:  
; Wait for completion of previous write  
sbic  
rjmp  
EECR,EEPE  
EEPROM_write  
; Set Programming mode  
ldi  
out  
r16, (0<<EEPM1)|(0<<EEPM0)  
EECR, r16  
; Set up address (r17) in address register  
out EEARL, r17  
; Write data (r16) to data register  
out EEDR,r16  
; Write logical one to EEMWE  
sbi EECR,EEMWE  
; Start eeprom write by setting EEWE  
sbi  
ret  
EECR,EEWE  
C Code Example  
void EEPROM_write(unsigned char ucAddress, unsigned char ucData)  
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */  
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))  
;
/* Set Programming mode */  
EECR = (0<<EEPM1)|(0>>EEPM0)  
/* Set up address and data registers */  
EEARL = ucAddress;  
EEDR = ucData;  
/* Write logical one to EEMWE */  
EECR |= (1<<EEMWE);  
/* Start eeprom write by setting EEWE */  
EECR |= (1<<EEWE);  
}
16  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts  
are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions.  
Assembly Code Example  
EEPROM_read:  
; Wait for completion of previous write  
sbic  
rjmp  
EECR,EEPE  
EEPROM_read  
; Set up address (r17) in address register  
out EEARL, r17  
; Start eeprom read by writing EERE  
sbi EECR,EERE  
; Read data from data register  
in  
r16,EEDR  
ret  
C Code Example  
unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned char ucAddress)  
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */  
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))  
;
/* Set up address register */  
EEARL = ucAddress;  
/* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */  
EECR |= (1<<EERE);  
/* Return data from data register */  
return EEDR;  
}
4.3.10 Preventing EEPROM Corruption  
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the  
EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design  
solutions should be applied.  
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to  
the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly,  
if the supply voltage is too low.  
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design recommendation:  
Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by enabling the  
internal brown-out detector (BOD). If the detection level of the internal BOD does not match the needed detection level, an  
external low VCC reset protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write  
operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
17  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
4.4  
I/O Memory  
The I/O space definition of the ATtiny25/45/85 is shown in Section “” on page 164.  
All ATtiny25/45/85 I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations may be accessed by the LD/LDS/LDD  
and ST/STS/STD instructions, transferring data between the 32 general purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O  
registers within the address range 0x00 – 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these  
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the instruction set  
section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used.  
When addressing I/O registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses.  
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses  
should never be written.  
Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate  
on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work  
with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.  
The I/O and peripherals control registers are explained in later sections.  
18  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
5.  
System Clock and Clock Options  
5.1  
Clock Systems and their Distribution  
Figure 5-1 presents the principal clock systems in the AVR® and their distribution. All of the clocks need not be active at a  
given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules not being used can be halted by using different  
sleep modes, as described in Section 6. “Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 28. The clock systems are detailed  
below.  
Figure 5-1. Clock Distribution  
General I/O  
Modules  
Flash and  
EEPROM  
ADC  
CPU Core  
RAM  
clkPCK  
clkI/O  
clkCPU  
AVR Clock  
Control Unit  
clkADC  
clkFLASH  
Reset Logic  
Watchdog Timer  
Source clock  
Watchdog clock  
System Clock  
Prescaler  
clkPCK  
Watchdog  
Oscillator  
PLL  
Oscillator  
Clock  
Multiplexer  
Crystal  
Oscillator  
Low-frequency  
Crystal Oscillator  
Calibrated RC  
Oscillator  
External Clock  
5.1.1 CPU Clock – clkCPU  
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core. Examples of such modules are  
the general purpose register File, the status register and the data memory holding the stack pointer. Halting the CPU clock  
inhibits the core from performing general operations and calculations.  
5.1.2 I/O Clock – clkI/O  
The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counter. The I/O clock is also used by the external  
interrupt module, but note that some external interrupts are detected by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be  
detected even if the I/O clock is halted.  
5.1.3 Flash Clock – clkFLASH  
The flash clock controls operation of the flash interface. The flash clock is usually active simultaneously with the CPU clock.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
19  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
5.1.4 ADC Clock – clkADC  
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks in order to reduce noise  
generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion results.  
5.1.5 Internal PLL for Fast Peripheral Clock Generation - clkPCK  
The internal PLL in ATtiny25/45/85 generates a clock frequency that is 8x multiplied from a source input. The source of the  
PLL input clock is the output of the internal RC oscillator having a frequency of 8.0MHz. Thus the output of the PLL, the fast  
peripheral clock is 64MHz. The fast peripheral clock, or a clock prescaled from that, can be selected as the clock source for  
Timer/Counter1. See the Figure 5-2.  
The PLL is locked on the RC oscillator and adjusting the RC oscillator via OSCCAL register will adjust the fast peripheral  
clock at the same time. However, even if the RC oscillator is taken to a higher frequency than 8MHz, the fast peripheral clock  
frequency saturates at 85MHz (worst case) and remains oscillating at the maximum frequency. It should be noted that the  
PLL in this case is not locked any longer with the RC oscillator clock.  
Therefore, it is recommended not to take the OSCCAL adjustments to a higher frequency than 8MHz in order to keep the  
PLL in the correct operating range. The internal PLL is enabled only when the PLLE bit in PLLCSR is set or the PLLCK fuse  
is programmed (‘0’). The bit PLOCK from PLLCSR is set when PLL is locked.  
Both internal RC oscillator and PLL are switched off in power down and stand-by sleep modes.  
Figure 5-2. PCK Clocking System  
OSCCAL PLLE  
PLLCK and CKSEL FUSES  
CLKPS3..0  
PLOCK  
Lock  
Detector  
PCK  
RC Oscillator  
8.0MHz  
PLL  
8x/4x  
64/25.6MHz  
Divide  
by 4  
SYSTEM  
CLOCK  
System  
Clock  
Prescaler  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
Oscillators  
20  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
5.2  
Clock Sources  
The device has the following clock source options, selectable by flash fuse bits as shown below. The clock from the selected  
source is input to the AVR® clock generator, and routed to the appropriate modules.  
Table 5-1. Device Clocking Options Select(1)  
Device Clocking Option  
External clock  
CKSEL3..0  
0000  
PLL clock  
0001  
Calibrated internal RC oscillator 8.0MHz  
Watchdog oscillator 128kHz  
External low-frequency crystal  
External crystal/ceramic resonator  
Reserved  
0010  
0100  
0110  
1000-1111  
0101, 0111, 0011  
Note:  
1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.  
The various choices for each clocking option is given in the following sections. When the CPU wakes up from power-down or  
power-save, the selected clock source is used to time the start-up, ensuring stable oscillator operation before instruction  
execution starts. When the CPU starts from reset, there is an additional delay allowing the power to reach a stable level  
before commencing normal operation. The watchdog oscillator is used for timing this real-time part of the start-up time. The  
number of WDT oscillator cycles used for each time-out is shown in Table 5-2.  
Table 5-2. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles  
Typ Time-out  
4ms  
Number of Cycles  
512  
64ms  
8K (8,192)  
5.3  
5.4  
Default Clock Source  
The device is shipped with CKSEL = “0010”, SUT = “10”, and CKDIV8 programmed. The default clock source setting is  
therefore the internal RC oscillator running at 8MHz with longest start-up time and an initial system clock prescaling of 8.  
This default setting ensures that all users can make their desired clock source setting using an in-system or high-voltage  
programmer.  
Crystal Oscillator  
XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be configured for use as an on-chip  
oscillator, as shown in Figure 5-3. Either a quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used.  
C1 and C2 should always be equal for both crystals and resonators. The optimal value of the capacitors depends on the  
crystal or resonator in use, the amount of stray capacitance, and the electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial  
guidelines for choosing capacitors for use with crystals are given in Table 5-3. For ceramic resonators, the capacitor values  
given by the manufacturer should be used.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
21  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
Figure 5-3. Crystal Oscillator Connections  
C2  
C1  
XTAL2  
XTAL1  
GND  
The oscillator can operate in three different modes, each optimized for a specific frequency range. The operating mode is  
selected by the fuses CKSEL3..1 as shown in Table 5-3.  
Table 5-3. Crystal Oscillator Operating Modes  
Recommended Range for Capacitors C1 and C2 for Use  
CKSEL3..1  
100(1)  
101  
Frequency Range (MHz)  
0.4 to 0.9  
with Crystals (pF)  
0.9 to 3.0  
12 to 22  
12 to 22  
12 to 22  
110  
3.0 to 8.0  
111  
8.0 –  
Note:  
1. This option should not be used with crystals, only with ceramic resonators.  
The CKSEL0 fuse together with the SUT1..0 fuses select the start-up times as shown in Table 5-4.  
Table 5-4. Start-up Times for the Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time from Power-  
down and Power-save  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
CKSEL0  
SUT1..0  
Recommended Usage  
Ceramic resonator, fast rising  
power  
0
00  
258 CK(1)  
258 CK(1)  
1KCK(2)  
14CK + 4ms  
14CK + 64ms  
14CK  
Ceramic resonator, slowly rising  
power  
0
0
0
01  
10  
11  
Ceramic resonator, BOD  
enabled  
Ceramic resonator, fast rising  
power  
1KCK(2)  
14CK + 4ms  
Ceramic resonator, slowly rising  
power  
1
1
1
00  
01  
10  
1KCK(2)  
16KCK  
16KCK  
14CK + 64ms  
14CK  
Crystal oscillator, BOD enabled  
Crystal oscillator, fast rising  
power  
14CK + 4ms  
Crystal oscillator, slowly rising  
power  
1
11  
16KCK  
14CK + 64ms  
Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and  
only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. These options are not suitable for  
crystals.  
2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency stability at start-up.  
They can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the device, and if  
frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application.  
22  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
5.5  
Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator  
To use a 32.768kHz watch crystal as the clock source for the device, the low-frequency crystal oscillator must be selected by  
setting CKSEL fuses to ‘0110’. The crystal should be connected as shown in Figure 5-3 on page 22. Refer to the 32kHz  
crystal oscillator application note for details on oscillator operation and how to choose appropriate values for C1 and C2.  
When this oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in Table 5-5.  
Table 5-5. Start-up Times for the Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time from Power  
Down and Power Save  
Additional Delay from Power  
On Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
SUT1..0  
00  
Recommended usage  
1K CK(1)  
1K CK(1)  
32K CK  
4ms  
Fast rising power or BOD enabled  
Slowly rising power  
01  
64ms  
10  
64ms  
Stable frequency at start-up  
11  
Reserved  
Note:  
1. These options should only be used if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application.  
5.6  
Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator  
The calibrated internal RC oscillator provides an 8.0MHz clock. The frequency is the nominal value at 3V and 25°C. If the  
frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8 fuse must be programmed in order to  
divide the internal frequency by 8 during start-up. See Section 5.10 “System Clock Prescaler” on page 26 for more details.  
This clock may be selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses as shown in Table 5-6. If selected, it will  
operate with no external components. During reset, hardware loads the calibration byte into the OSCCAL register and  
thereby automatically calibrates the RC oscillator. At 3V and 25°C, this calibration gives a frequency within ±1% of the  
nominal frequency. When this oscillator is used as the chip clock, the watchdog oscillator will still be used for the watchdog  
timer and for the reset time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed calibration value, see Section 20.4  
“Calibration Byte” on page 125.  
Table 5-6. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes  
CKSEL3..0  
Nominal Frequency  
0010(1)  
8.0MHz  
Note:  
1. The device is shipped with this option selected.  
When this oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in Table 5-7.  
Table 5-7. Start-up Times for the Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time  
from Power-down  
Additional Delay from Reset  
(VCC = 5.0V)  
SUT1..0  
00  
Recommended Usage  
BOD enabled  
6CK  
6CK  
6CK  
14CK + 4ms  
14CK + 4ms  
14CK + 64ms  
Reserved  
01  
10(1)  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
11  
Note:  
1. The device is shipped with this option selected.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
23  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
5.6.1 Oscillator Calibration Register – OSCCAL  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CAL7  
R/W  
CAL6  
R/W  
CAL5  
R/W  
CAL4  
R/W  
CAL3  
R/W  
CAL2  
R/W  
CAL1  
R/W  
CAL0  
R/W  
OSCCAL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Device Specific Calibration Value  
• Bits 7..0 – CAL7..0: Oscillator Calibration Value  
Writing the calibration byte to this address will trim the internal oscillator to remove process variations from the oscillator  
frequency. This is done automatically during chip reset. When OSCCAL is zero, the lowest available frequency is chosen.  
Writing non-zero values to this register will increase the frequency of the internal oscillator. Writing 0xFF to the register gives  
the highest available frequency. The calibrated oscillator is used to time EEPROM and flash access. If EEPROM or flash is  
written, do not calibrate to more than 8.8MHz frequency. Otherwise, the EEPROM or flash write may fail.  
The CAL7 bit determines the range of operation for the oscillator. Setting this bit to 0 gives the lowest frequency range,  
setting this bit to 1 gives the highest frequency range. The two frequency ranges are overlapping, in other words a setting of  
OSCCAL = 0x7F gives a higher frequency than OSCCAL = 0x80.  
The CAL6..0 bits are used to tune the frequency within the selected range. A setting of 0x00 gives the lowest frequency in  
that range, and a setting of 0x7F gives the highest frequency in the range. Incrementing CAL6..0 by 1 will give a frequency  
increment of less than 2% in the frequency range 7.3 to 8.1MHz.  
Avoid changing the calibration value in large steps when calibrating the calibrated internal RC oscillator to ensure stable  
operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from one cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable  
behavior. Changes in OSCCAL should not exceed 0x20 for each calibration. It is required to ensure that the MCU is kept in  
reset during such changes in the clock frequency  
Table 5-8. Internal RC Oscillator Frequency Range  
Min Frequency in Percentage of Nominal  
Frequency  
Max Frequency in Percentage of Nominal  
Frequency  
OSCCAL Value  
0x00  
50%  
75%  
100%  
150%  
200%  
0x3F  
0x7F  
100%  
5.7  
External Clock  
To drive the device from an external clock source, CLKI should be driven as shown in Figure 5-4. To run the device on an  
external clock, the CKSEL fuses must be programmed to “00”.  
Figure 5-4. External Clock Drive Configuration  
External  
Clock  
Signal  
CLKI  
GND  
24  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in Table 5-9.  
Table 5-9. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection  
Start-up Time from Power-down and  
SUT1..0  
Power-save  
Additional Delay from Reset Recommended Usage  
00  
6CK  
14CK  
14CK + 4ms  
14CK + 64ms  
Reserved  
BOD enabled  
01  
6CK  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
10  
6CK  
11  
Note that the system clock prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of the internal clock frequency while still  
ensuring stable operation. Refer to Section 5.10 “System Clock Prescaler” on page 26 for details.  
5.7.1 High Frequency PLL Clock - PLLCLK  
There is an internal PLL that provides nominally 64MHz clock rate locked to the RC oscillator for the use of the peripheral  
Timer/Counter1 and for the system clock source. When selected as a system clock source, by programming the CKSEL  
fuses to ‘0001’, it is divided by four like shown in Table 5-10. When this clock source is selected, start-up times are  
determined by the SUT fuses as shown in Table 5-11. See also Section 5-2 “PCK Clocking System” on page 20.  
Table 5-10. PLLCK Operating Modes  
CKSEL3..0  
Nominal Frequency  
0001  
16MHz  
Table 5-11. Start-up Times for the PLLCK  
Start-up Time from Power Down and  
Additional Delay from Reset  
SUT1..0  
Power Save  
(VCC = 5.0V)  
14CK + 8ms  
14CK + 8ms  
14CK + 68ms  
14CK + 68ms  
Recommended usage  
BOD enabled  
00  
1KCK  
01  
16KCK  
1KCK  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
Slowly rising power  
10  
11  
16KCK  
5.8  
128 kHz Internal Oscillator  
The 128kHz internal oscillator is a low power oscillator providing a clock of 128kHz. The frequency is nominal at 3V and  
25°C. This clock may be select as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses to “11”.  
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in Table 5-12.  
Table 5-12. Start-up Times for the 128kHz Internal Oscillator  
Start-up Time from Power-down and  
SUT1..0  
Power-save  
Additional Delay from Reset Recommended Usage  
00  
6CK  
14CK  
14CK + 4ms  
14CK + 64ms  
Reserved  
BOD enabled  
01  
6CK  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
10  
6CK  
11  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
25  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
5.9  
Clock Output Buffer  
The device can output the system clock on the CLKO pin. To enable the output, the CKOUT fuse has to be programmed.  
This mode is suitable when the chip clock is used to drive other circuits on the system. Note that the clock will not be output  
during reset and the normal operation of I/O pin will be overridden when the fuse is programmed. Any clock source, including  
the internal RC oscillator, can be selected when the clock is output on CLKO. If the system clock prescaler is used, it is the  
divided system clock that is output.  
5.10 System Clock Prescaler  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 system clock can be divided by setting the clock prescale register – CLKPR. This feature can be  
used to decrease power consumption when the requirement for processing power is low. This can be used with all clock  
source options, and it will affect the clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. clkI/O, clkADC, clkCPU, and  
clkFLASH are divided by a factor as shown in Table 5-13 on page 27.  
5.10.1 Clock Prescale Register – CLKPR  
Bit  
7
CLKPCE  
R/W  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0  
R/W R/W R/W R/W  
See Bit Description  
CLKPR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 7 – CLKPCE: Clock Prescaler Change Enable  
The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The CLKPCE bit is only updated when the  
other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to zero. CLKPCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when  
the CLKPS bits are written. Rewriting the CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend the time-out period, nor  
clear the CLKPCE bit.  
• Bits 6..4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 3..0 – CLKPS3..0: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3 - 0  
These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system clock. These bits can be  
written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the application requirements. As the divider divides the master clock input  
to the MCU, the speed of all synchronous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The division factors are  
given in Table 5-13 on page 27.  
To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must be followed to change the CLKPS bits:  
1. Write the clock prescaler change enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bits in CLKPR to zero.  
2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to CLKPCE.  
Interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler setting to make sure the write procedure is not interrupted.  
The CKDIV8 fuse determines the initial value of the CLKPS bits. If CKDIV8 is unprogrammed, the CLKPS bits will be reset to  
“0000”. If CKDIV8 is programmed, CLKPS bits are reset to “0011”, giving a division factor of eight at start up. This feature  
should be used if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present  
operating conditions. Note that any value can be written to the CLKPS bits regardless of the CKDIV8 fuse setting. The  
application software must ensure that a sufficient division factor is chosen if the selected clock source has a higher  
frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present operating conditions. The device is shipped with the  
CKDIV8 fuse programmed.  
26  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
Table 5-13. Clock Prescaler Select  
CLKPS3  
CLKPS2  
CLKPS1  
CLKPS0  
Clock Division Factor  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
256  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
5.10.2 Switching Time  
When switching between prescaler settings, the system clock prescaler ensures that no glitches occur in the clock system  
and that no intermediate frequency is higher than neither the clock frequency corresponding to the previous setting, nor the  
clock frequency corresponding to the new setting.  
The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at the frequency of the undivided clock, which may be faster than the  
CPU’s clock frequency. Hence, it is not possible to determine the state of the prescaler – even if it were readable, and the  
exact time it takes to switch from one clock division to another cannot be exactly predicted.  
From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2 × T2 before the new clock frequency is  
active. In this interval, 2 active clock edges are produced. Here, T1 is the previous clock period, and T2 is the period  
corresponding to the new prescaler setting.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
27  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
6.  
Power Management and Sleep Modes  
The high performance and industry leading code efficiency makes the AVR® microcontrollers an ideal choice for low power  
applications.  
Sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU, thereby saving power. The AVR provides  
various sleep modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to the application’s requirements.  
To enter any of the three sleep modes, the SE bit in MCUCR must be written to logic one and a SLEEP instruction must be  
executed. The SM1..0 bits in the MCUCR register select which sleep mode (idle, ADC noise reduction, or power-down) will  
be activated by the SLEEP instruction. See Table 6-1 for a summary. If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a  
sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU is then halted for four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the  
interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. The contents of the register file and SRAM  
are unaltered when the device wakes up from sleep. If a reset occurs during sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes  
from the reset vector.  
Figure 5-1 on page 19 presents the different clock systems in the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85, and their distribution. The figure is  
helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode.  
6.1  
MCU Control Register – MCUCR  
The MCU control register contains control bits for power management.  
Bit  
7
BODS  
R/W  
0
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
BODSE  
R/W  
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bit 7 – BODS: BOD Sleep  
BOD disable functionality is available in some devices, only. See Section 6.5 “Limitations” on page 29.  
In order to disable BOD during sleep (see Table 6-2 on page 29) the BODS bit must be written to logic one. This is controlled  
by a timed sequence and the enable bit, BODSE in MCUCR. First both BODS and BODSE must be set to one. Second,  
within four clock cycles, BODS must be set to one and BODSE must be set to zero. The BODS bit is active three clock  
cycles after it is set. A sleep instruction must be executed while BODS is active in order to turn off the BOD for the actual  
sleep mode. The BODS bit is automatically cleared after three clock cycles.  
In devices where sleeping BOD has not been implemented this bit is unused and will always read zero.  
• Bit 5 – SE: Sleep Enable  
The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed. To  
avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmer’s purpose, it is recommended to write the sleep enable  
(SE) bit to one just before the execution of the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after waking up.  
• Bits 4, 3 – SM1..0: Sleep Mode Select Bits 2..0  
These bits select between the three available sleep modes as shown in Table 6-1.  
Table 6-1. Sleep Mode Select  
SM1  
SM0  
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
ADC noise reduction  
Power-down  
Stand-by mode  
• Bit 2 – BODSE: BOD Sleep Enable  
BOD disable functionality is available in some devices, only. See Section 6.5 “Limitations” on page 29.  
The BODSE bit enables setting of BODS control bit, as explained on BODS bit description. BOD disable is controlled by a  
timed sequence.  
This bit is unused in devices where software BOD disable has not been implemented and will read as zero in those devices.  
28  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
Idle Mode  
When the SM1..0 bits are written to 00, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter idle mode, stopping the CPU but  
allowing analog comparator, ADC, Timer/Counter, watchdog, and the interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep  
mode basically halts clkCPU and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.  
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal ones like the timer overflow. If  
wake-up from the analog comparator interrupt is not required, the analog comparator can be powered down by setting the  
ACD bit in the analog comparator control and status register – ACSR. This will reduce power consumption in Idle mode. If  
the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered.  
ADC Noise Reduction Mode  
When the SM1..0 bits are written to 01, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC noise reduction mode, stopping  
the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, and the watchdog to continue operating (if enabled). This sleep mode  
halts clkI/O, clkCPU, and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.  
This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If the ADC is enabled, a  
conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. Apart form the ADC conversion complete interrupt, only an  
external reset, a watchdog reset, a brown-out reset, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT0 or  
a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU from ADC noise reduction mode.  
Power-down Mode  
When the SM1..0 bits are written to 10, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter power-down mode. In this mode, the  
oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, and the watchdog continue operating (if enabled). Only an external reset,  
a watchdog reset, a brown-out reset, an external level interrupt on INT0, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU.  
This sleep mode halts all generated clocks, allowing operation of asynchronous modules only.  
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from power-down mode, the changed level must be held for some  
time to wake up the MCU. Refer to Section 10. “External Interrupts” on page 54 for details.  
Table 6-2. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes  
Active Clock Domains  
Oscillators  
Wake-up Sources  
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ADC Noise  
Reduction  
X(1)  
X(1)  
Power-down  
Note:  
1. For INT0, only level interrupt.  
6.5  
Limitations  
BOD disable functionality has been implemented in the following devices, only:  
ATtiny25, revision D, and newer  
ATtiny45, revision D, and newer  
ATtiny85, revision C, and newer  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
29  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
6.6  
Power Reduction Register  
The power reduction register, PRR, provides a method to stop the clock to individual peripherals to reduce power  
consumption. The current state of the peripheral is frozen and the I/O registers can not be read or written. Resources used  
by the peripheral when stopping the clock will remain occupied, hence the peripheral should in most cases be disabled  
before stopping the clock. Waking up a module, which is done by clearing the bit in PRR, puts the module in the same state  
as before shutdown.  
Module shutdown can be used in idle mode and active mode to significantly reduce the overall power consumption. In all  
other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped.  
Bit  
7
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
PRTIM1  
R/W  
0
2
PRTIM0  
R/W  
0
1
PRUSI  
R/W  
0
0
PRADC  
R/W  
0
PRR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 6, 5, 4- Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3- PRTIM1: Power Reduction Timer/Counter1  
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter1 module. When the Timer/Counter1 is enabled, operation will  
continue like before the shutdown.  
• Bit 2- PRTIM0: Power Reduction Timer/Counter0  
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter0 module. When the Timer/Counter0 is enabled, operation will  
continue like before the shutdown.  
• Bit 1 - PRUSI: Power Reduction USI  
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the USI by stopping the clock to the module. When waking up the USI again, the  
USI should be re initialized to ensure proper operation.  
• Bit 0 - PRADC: Power Reduction ADC  
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the ADC. The ADC must be disabled before shut down. The analog comparator  
cannot use the ADC input MUX when the ADC is shut down.  
6.7  
Minimizing Power Consumption  
There are several issues to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR® controlled system. In  
general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep mode should be selected so that as few as  
possible of the device’s functions are operating. All functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following  
modules may need special consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption.  
6.7.1 Analog to Digital Converter  
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be disabled before entering any  
sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to  
Section 17. “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 101 for details on ADC operation.  
6.7.2 Analog Comparator  
When entering Idle mode, the analog comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering ADC noise reduction mode,  
the analog comparator should be disabled. In the other sleep modes, the analog comparator is automatically disabled.  
However, if the analog comparator is set up to use the Internal voltage reference as input, the analog comparator should be  
disabled in all sleep modes. Otherwise, the internal voltage reference will be enabled, independent of sleep mode. Refer to  
Section 16. “Analog Comparator” on page 98 for details on how to configure the analog comparator.  
30  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
6.7.3 Brown-out Detector  
If the brown-out detector is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the brown-out detector is  
enabled by the BODLEVEL fuses, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper  
sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consumption. Refer to Section 7.5 “Brown-out Detection” on  
page 35 for details on how to configure the brown-out detector.  
6.7.4 Internal Voltage Reference  
The internal voltage reference will be enabled when needed by the brown-out detection, the analog comparator or the ADC.  
If these modules are disabled as described in the sections above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and it will  
not be consuming power. When turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is used. If  
the reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately. Refer to Section 7.8 “Internal Voltage  
Reference” on page 37 for details on the start-up time.  
6.7.5 Watchdog Timer  
If the watchdog timer is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the watchdog timer is enabled, it  
will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute  
significantly to the total current consumption. Refer to Section 7.9 “Watchdog Timer” on page 38 for details on how to  
configure the watchdog timer.  
6.7.6 Port Pins  
When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The most important thing is then to  
ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where both the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are  
stopped, the input buffers of the device will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not  
needed. In some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be enabled. Refer to the  
Section 9.2.5 “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 47 for details on which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is  
enabled and the input signal is left floating or has an analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use excessive  
power.  
For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal level close to VCC/2 on an input  
pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital input buffers can be disabled by writing to the digital input  
disable register (DIDR0). Refer to Section 16.3.1 “Digital Input Disable Register 0 – DIDR0” on page 100 for details.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
31  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
7.  
System Control and Reset  
7.1  
Resetting the AVR  
During reset, all I/O registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution from the reset vector. The  
instruction placed at the reset vector must be a RJMP – relative jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. If the  
program never enables an interrupt source, the interrupt vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at  
these locations. The circuit diagram in Figure 7-1 on page 33 shows the reset logic. Table on page 34 defines the electrical  
parameters of the reset circuitry.  
The I/O ports of the AVR® are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source goes active. This does not require  
any clock source to be running.  
After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal reset. This allows the power to  
reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The time-out period of the delay counter is defined by the user through  
the SUT and CKSEL fuses. The different selections for the delay period are presented in Section 5.2 “Clock Sources” on  
page 21.  
7.2  
Reset Sources  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 has four sources of reset:  
Power-on reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the power-on reset threshold (VPOT).  
External reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer than the minimum pulse  
length.  
Watchdog reset. The MCU is reset when the watchdog timer period expires and the watchdog is enabled.  
Brown-out reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC is below the brown-out reset threshold (VBOT) and the  
brown-out detector is enabled.  
32  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 7-1. Reset Logic  
DATA BUS  
MCU Status  
Register (MCUSR)  
Power-on Reset  
Circuit  
VCC  
Brown-out  
BODLEVEL [1..0]  
RESET  
Reset Circuit  
Pull-up Resistor  
Q
Spike  
Filter  
Reset Circuit  
S
R
Watchdog  
Timer  
Watchdog  
Oscillator  
Delay Counters  
CK  
Clock  
Generator  
TIMEOUT  
CKSEL[1:0]  
SUT[1:0]  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
33  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
7.3  
Power-on Reset  
A power-on reset (POR) pulse is generated by an on-chip detection circuit. The detection level is defined in Table . The POR  
is activated whenever VCC is below the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the start-up reset, as well as  
to detect a failure in supply voltage.  
A power-on reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from power-on. Reaching the power-on reset threshold  
voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The RESET signal  
is activated again, without any delay, when VCC decreases below the detection level.  
Figure 7-2. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC  
VCCRR  
VCC  
VPORMAX  
VPORMIN  
RESET  
VRST  
tTOUT  
Time-out  
Internal  
Reset  
Figure 7-3. MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
Time-out  
Internal  
Reset  
Table 7-1. Power On Reset Specifications  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
1.1  
0.8  
Typ  
1.4  
1.3  
Max  
1.7  
Units  
Power-on reset threshold voltage (rising)  
Power-on reset threshold voltage (falling)(1)  
V
V
VPOT  
1.6  
VCC Max. start voltage to ensure internal power-on reset  
signal  
VPORMAX  
VPORMIN  
0.4  
V
V
VCC Min. start voltage to ensure internal power-on reset  
signal  
–0.1  
VCC rise rate to ensure power-on reset  
RESET pin threshold voltage  
VCCRR  
VRST  
0.01  
V/ms  
V
0.1 VCC  
0.9VCC  
Note:  
1. Before rising the supply has to be between VPORMIN and VPORMAX to ensure reset.  
34  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
7.4  
External Reset  
An external reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin if enabled. Reset pulses longer than the minimum pulse  
width (see Table on page 34) will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to  
generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the reset threshold voltage – VRST – on its positive edge, the delay  
counter starts the MCU after the time-out period – tTOUT – has expired.  
Figure 7-4. External Reset During Operation  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
Time-out  
Internal  
Reset  
7.5  
Brown-out Detection  
ATtiny25/45/85 has an on-chip brown-out detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the VCC level during operation by comparing  
it to a fixed trigger level. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected by the BODLEVEL fuses. The trigger level has a  
hysteresis to ensure spike free brown-out detection. The hysteresis on the detection level should be interpreted as  
VBOT+ = VBOT + VHYST/2 and VBOT– = VBOT – VHYST/2.  
Table 7-2. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding(1)  
BODLEVEL [2..0] Fuses  
Min VBOT  
Typ VBOT  
BOD Disabled  
Max VBOT  
Units  
111  
110  
101  
100  
011  
010  
001  
000  
1.7  
2.5  
4.0  
1.8  
2.7  
2.0  
2.9  
4.6  
4.3  
2.3(2)  
2.2(2)  
1.9(2)  
2.0(2)  
V
Notes: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where this is the case,  
the device is tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guarantees that a brown-out reset will  
occur before VCC drops to a voltage where correct operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed.  
2. Centered value, not tested.  
Table 7-3. Brown-out Characteristics  
Parameter  
Symbol  
VRAM  
Min  
Typ  
50  
50  
2
Max  
Units  
mV  
mV  
µs  
RAM retention voltage(1)  
Brown-out detector hysteresis  
Min pulse width on brown-out reset  
VHYST  
tBOD  
Note:  
1. This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered without losing RAM data  
When the BOD is enabled, and VCC decreases to a value below the trigger level (VBOT– in Figure 7-5), the brown-out reset is  
immediately activated. When VCC increases above the trigger level (VBOT+ in Figure 7-5), the delay counter starts the MCU  
after the time-out period tTOUT has expired.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
35  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for longer than tBOD given in  
Table 7-1 on page 34.  
Figure 7-5. Brown-out Reset During Operation  
VCC  
VBOT+  
VBOT-  
RESET  
tTOUT  
Time-out  
Internal  
Reset  
7.6  
Watchdog Reset  
When the watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On the falling edge of this pulse,  
the delay timer starts counting the time-out period tTOUT. Refer to Section 7.9 “Watchdog Timer” on page 38 for details on  
operation of the watchdog timer.  
Figure 7-6. Watchdog Reset During Operation  
VCC  
RESET  
1 CK Cycle  
WDT  
Time-out  
tTOUT  
RESET  
Time-out  
Internal  
Reset  
36  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
7.7  
MCU Status Register – MCUSR  
The MCU status register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WDRF  
R/W  
BORF  
R/W  
EXTRF  
R/W  
PORF  
R/W  
MCUSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
See Bit Description  
• Bits 7..4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a watchdog reset occurs. The bit is reset by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a brown-out reset occurs. The bit is reset by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag  
This bit is set if an external reset occurs. The bit is reset by a power-on reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a power-on reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
To make use of the reset flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then reset the MCUSR as early as  
possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by  
examining the reset flags.  
7.8  
Internal Voltage Reference  
Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is used for brown-out detection, and it can be  
used as an input to the analog comparator or the ADC.  
7.8.1 Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time  
The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence the way it should be used. The start-up time is given in  
Table 7-4. To save power, the reference is not always turned on. The reference is on during the following situations:  
1. When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL [2..0] fuse bits).  
2. When the bandgap reference is connected to the analog comparator (by setting the ACBG bit in ACSR).  
3. When the ADC is enabled.  
Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC, the user must always allow the  
reference to start up before the output from the analog comparator or ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in  
power-down mode, the user can avoid the three conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off before entering  
power-down mode.  
Table 7-4. Internal Voltage Reference Characteristics  
Parameter  
Condition  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
1.2  
70  
Units  
VCC = 1.1V/2.7V,  
TA = 25°C  
Bandgap reference voltage  
VBG  
1.0  
1.1  
V
Bandgap reference start-up time  
VCC = 2.7V, TA = 25°C  
VCC = 2.7V, TA = 25°C  
tBG  
IBG  
40  
15  
µs  
Bandgap reference current consumption  
µA  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
37  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
7.9  
Watchdog Timer  
The watchdog timer is clocked from an on-chip oscillator which runs at 128kHz. By controlling the watchdog timer prescaler,  
the watchdog reset interval can be adjusted as shown in Table 7-7 on page 40. The WDR – watchdog reset – instruction  
resets the watchdog timer. The watchdog timer is also reset when it is disabled and when a chip reset occurs. Ten different  
clock cycle periods can be selected to determine the reset period. If the reset period expires without another watchdog reset,  
the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 resets and executes from the reset vector. For timing details on the watchdog reset, refer to  
Table 7-7 on page 40.  
The watchdog timer can also be configured to generate an interrupt instead of a reset. This can be very helpful when using  
the watchdog to wake-up from power-down.  
To prevent unintentional disabling of the watchdog or unintentional change of time-out period, two different safety levels are  
selected by the fuse WDTON as shown in Table 7-5 Refer to Section 7.10 “Timed Sequences for Changing the Configuration  
of the Watchdog Timer” on page 41 for details.  
Table 7-5. WDT Configuration as a Function of the Fuse Settings of WDTON  
WDTON  
Safety Level  
WDT Initial State  
Disabled  
How to Disable the WDT  
Timed sequence  
How to Change Time-out  
No limitations  
Unprogrammed  
Programmed  
1
2
Enabled  
Always enabled  
Timed sequence  
Figure 7-7. Watchdog Timer  
128kHz  
Oscillator  
Watchdog  
Prescaler  
Watchdog  
Reset  
WDP0  
WDP1  
WDP2  
WDP3  
WDE  
MCU Reset  
7.9.1 Watchdog Timer Control Register – WDTCR  
Bit  
7
WDIF  
R/W  
0
6
WDIE  
R/W  
0
5
WDP3  
R/W  
0
4
WDCE  
R/W  
0
3
2
WDP2  
R/W  
0
1
WDP1  
R/W  
0
0
WDP0  
R/W  
0
WDE  
R/W  
X
WDTCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bit 7 – WDIF: Watchdog Timeout Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the watchdog timer and the watchdog timer is configured for interrupt. WDIF is  
cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, WDIF is cleared by writing a  
logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG and WDIE are set, the watchdog time-out interrupt is executed.  
38  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
• Bit 6 – WDIE: Watchdog Timeout Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one, WDE is cleared, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the watchdog time-out interrupt is  
enabled. In this mode the corresponding interrupt is executed instead of a reset if a time-out in the watchdog timer occurs.  
If WDE is set, WDIE is automatically cleared by hardware when a time-out occurs. This is useful for keeping the watchdog  
reset security while using the interrupt. After the WDIE bit is cleared, the next time-out will generate a reset. To avoid the  
watchdog reset, WDIE must be set after each interrupt.  
Table 7-6. Watchdog Timer Configuration  
WDE  
WDIE  
Watchdog Timer State  
Stopped  
Action on Time-out  
None  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Running  
Interrupt  
Running  
Reset  
Running  
Interrupt  
• Bit 4 – WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable  
This bit must be set when the WDE bit is written to logic zero. Otherwise, the watchdog will not be disabled. Once written to  
one, hardware will clear this bit after four clock cycles. Refer to the description of the WDE bit for a watchdog disable  
procedure. This bit must also be set when changing the prescaler bits. See Section 7.10 “Timed Sequences for Changing  
the Configuration of the Watchdog Timer” on page 41  
• Bit 3 – WDE: Watchdog Enable  
When the WDE is written to logic one, the watchdog timer is enabled, and if the WDE is written to logic zero, the watchdog  
timer function is disabled. WDE can only be cleared if the WDCE bit has logic level one. To disable an enabled watchdog  
timer, the following procedure must be followed:  
1. In the same operation, write a logic one to WDCE and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE even though it is  
set to one before the disable operation starts.  
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write a logic 0 to WDE. This disables the watchdog.  
In safety level 2, it is not possible to disable the watchdog timer, even with the algorithm described above. See Section 7.10  
“Timed Sequences for Changing the Configuration of the Watchdog Timer” on page 41  
In safety level 1, WDE is overridden by WDRF in MCUSR. See Section 7.7 “MCU Status Register – MCUSR” on page 37 for  
description of WDRF. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is set. To clear WDE, WDRF must be cleared before  
disabling the Watchdog with the procedure described above. This feature ensures multiple resets during conditions causing  
failure, and a safe start-up after the failure.  
Note:  
If the watchdog timer is not going to be used in the application, it is important to go through a watchdog disable  
procedure in the initialization of the device. If the watchdog is accidentally enabled, for example by a runaway  
pointer or brown-out condition, the device will be reset, which in turn will lead to a new watchdog reset. To  
avoid this situation, the application software should always clear the WDRF flag and the WDE control bit in the  
initialization routine.  
• Bits 5, 2..0 – WDP3..0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1, and 0  
The WDP3..0 bits determine the watchdog timer prescaling when the watchdog timer is enabled. The different prescaling  
values and their corresponding time-out periods are shown in Table 7-7.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
39  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 7-7. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select  
Typical Time-out at  
VCC = 5.0V  
WDP3  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
Number of WDT Oscillator Cycles  
2Kcycles  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16ms  
32ms  
64ms  
0.125s  
0.25s  
0.5s  
4Kcycles  
8Kcycles  
16Kcycles  
32Kcycles  
64Kcycles  
128Kcycles  
1.0s  
256Kcycles  
2.0s  
512Kcycles  
4.0s  
1024Kcycles  
8.0s  
Reserved(1)  
Note:  
1. If selected, one of the valid settings below 0b1010 will be used.  
40  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the WDT. The example assumes that  
interrupts are controlled (e.g., by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these  
functions  
.
Assembly Code Example(1)  
WDT_off:  
WDR  
; Clear WDRF in MCUSR  
ldi  
out  
r16, (0<<WDRF)  
MCUSR, r16  
; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE  
; Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional Watchdog  
Reset  
in  
ori  
out  
r16, WDTCR  
r16, (1<<WDCE)|(1<<WDE)  
WDTCR, r16  
; Turn off WDT  
ldi  
out  
ret  
r16, (0<<WDE)  
WDTCR, r16  
C Code Example(1)  
void WDT_off(void)  
{
_WDR();  
/* Clear WDRF in MCUSR */  
MCUSR = 0x00  
/* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */  
WDTCR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);  
/* Turn off WDT */  
WDTCR = 0x00;  
}
Note:  
1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included.  
7.10 Timed Sequences for Changing the Configuration of the Watchdog Timer  
The sequence for changing configuration differs slightly between the two safety levels. Separate procedures are described  
for each level.  
7.10.1 Safety Level 1  
In this mode, the watchdog timer is initially disabled, but can be enabled by writing the WDE bit to one without any restriction.  
A timed sequence is needed when disabling an enabled watchdog timer. To disable an enabled watchdog timer, the  
following procedure must be followed:  
1. In the same operation, write a logic one to WDCE and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE regardless of the  
previous value of the WDE bit.  
2. Within the next four clock cycles, in the same operation, write the WDE and WDP bits as desired, but with the  
WDCE bit cleared.  
7.10.2 Safety Level 2  
In this mode, the watchdog timer is always enabled, and the WDE bit will always read as one. A timed sequence is needed  
when changing the watchdog time-out period. To change the watchdog time-out, the following procedure must be followed:  
1. In the same operation, write a logical one to WDCE and WDE. Even though the WDE always is set, the WDE must  
be written to one to start the timed sequence.  
2. Within the next four clock cycles, in the same operation, write the WDP bits as desired, but with the WDCE bit  
cleared. The value written to the WDE bit is irrelevant.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
41  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
8.  
Interrupts  
This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling as performed in Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85. For a general  
explanation of the AVR® interrupt handling, refer to Section 3.8 “Reset and Interrupt Handling” on page 10.  
8.1  
Interrupt Vectors in ATtiny25/45/85  
Table 8-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors  
Vector No.  
Program Address Source  
Interrupt Definition  
1
2
0x0000  
0x0001  
0x0002  
0x0003  
0x0004  
0x0005  
0x0006  
0x0007  
0x0008  
0x0009  
0x000A  
0x000B  
0x000C  
0x000D  
0x000E  
RESET  
INT0  
External pin, power-on reset, brown-out reset, watchdog reset  
External interrupt request 0  
3
PCINT0  
Pin change interrupt request 0  
4
TIM1_COMPA Timer/Counter1 compare match A  
5
TIM1_OVF  
TIM0_OVF  
EE_RDY  
ANA_COMP  
ADC  
Timer/Counter1 overflow  
Timer/Counter0 overflow  
EEPROM ready  
6
7
8
Analog comparator  
9
ADC conversion complete  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
TIM1_COMPB Timer/Counter1 compare match B  
TIM0_COMPA Timer/Counter0 compare match A  
TIM0_COMPB Timer/Counter0 compare match B  
WDT  
Watchdog time-out  
USI START  
USI_START  
USI_OVF  
USI overflow  
If the program never enables an interrupt source, the interrupt vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed  
at these locations. The most typical and general program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in Atmel  
ATtiny25/45/85 is:  
Address  
0x0000  
0x0001  
0x0002  
0x0003  
0x0004  
0x0005  
0x0006  
0x0007  
0x0008  
0x0009  
0x000A  
0x000B  
0x000C  
0x000D  
0x000E  
0x000F  
0x0010  
0x0011  
0x0012  
0x0013  
0x0014  
Labels Code  
rjmp  
rjmp  
Comments  
; Reset Handler  
RESET  
EXT_INT0  
PCINT0  
; IRQ0 Handler  
; PCINT0 Handler  
rjmp  
rjmp  
TIM1_COMPA  
TIM1_OVF  
TIM0_OVF  
EE_RDY  
; Timer1 CompareA Handler  
; Timer1 Overflow Handler  
rjmp  
rjmp  
; Timer0 Overflow Handler  
; EEPROM Ready Handler  
rjmp  
rjmp  
ANA_COMP  
ADC  
; Analog Comparator Handler  
; ADC Conversion Handler  
; Timer1 CompareB Handler  
rjmp  
rjmp  
TIM1_COMPB  
TIM0_COMPA  
TIM0_COMPB  
WDT  
rjmp  
rjmp  
;
;
;
;
;
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
USI_START  
USI_OVF  
RESET: ldi  
ldi  
out  
r16, low(RAMEND); Main program start  
r17, high(RAMEND); Tiny85 has also SPH  
SPL, r16  
SPH, r17  
; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM  
; Tiny85 has also SPH  
; Enable interrupts  
out  
sei  
<instr> xxx  
...  
...  
...  
...  
42  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
9.  
I/O Ports  
9.1  
Introduction  
All AVR® ports have true read-modify-write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports. This means that the direction  
of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI  
instructions. The same applies when changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors  
(if configured as input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability.  
The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors with  
a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have protection diodes to both VCC and ground as indicated in Figure 9-1.  
Refer to Section 21. “Electrical Characteristics” on page 137 for a complete list of parameters.  
Figure 9-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic  
Rpu  
Pxn  
Logic  
See Figure  
”General Digital I/O”  
for Details  
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” represents the numbering letter for  
the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the  
precise form must be used. For example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally as PORTxn. The  
physical I/O registers and bit locations are listed in Section 9.4 “Register Description for I/O-Ports” on page 53.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the data register – PORTx, data direction  
register – DDRx, and the port input Pins – PINx. The port input pins I/O location is read only, while the data register and the  
data direction register are read/write. However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx register, will result in a toggle in the  
corresponding bit in the data register. In addition, the pull-up disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the pull-up function for all  
pins in all ports when set.  
Using the I/O port as general digital I/O is described in Section 9.2 “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page 44. Most port pins  
are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the device. How each alternate function interferes with  
the port pin is described in Section 9.3 “Alternate Port Functions” on page 48. Refer to the individual module sections for a  
full description of the alternate functions.  
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the other pins in the port as  
general digital I/O.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
43  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
9.2  
Ports as General Digital I/O  
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 9-2 shows a functional description of one  
I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.  
Figure 9-2. General Digital I/O(1)  
PUD  
Q
Q
D
DDxn  
CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
RESET  
1
0
Pxn  
Q
D
PORTxn  
Q
CLR  
WPx  
RESET  
WRx  
SLEEP  
RRx  
RPx  
Synchronizer  
D
L
Q
Q
D
Q
Q
PINxn  
CLKI/O  
PUD:  
SLEEP:  
CLKI/O  
PULLUP DISABLE  
SLEEP CONTROL  
I/O CLOCK  
WDx:  
RDx:  
WRx:  
RRx:  
RPx:  
WPx:  
WRITE DDRx  
READ DDRx  
WRITE PORTx  
READ PORTx REGISTER  
READ PORTx PIN  
:
WRITE PINx REGISTER  
Note:  
1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD  
are common to all ports.  
44  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
9.2.1 Configuring the Pin  
Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in Section 9.4 “Register Description for  
I/O-Ports” on page 53, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address,  
and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.  
The DDxn bit in the DDRx register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one, Pxn is configured as an output  
pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input pin.  
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the  
pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The port pins are  
tri-stated when reset condition becomes active, even if no clocks are running.  
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If PORTxn is  
written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven low (zero).  
9.2.2 Toggling the Pin  
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn. Note that the SBI instruction  
can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.  
9.2.3 Switching Between Input and Output  
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11), an intermediate  
state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the  
pull-up enabled state is fully acceptable, as a high-impedant environment will not notice the difference between a strong high  
driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to disable all pull-ups in all ports.  
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user must use either the tri-state  
({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) as an intermediate step.  
Table 9-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.  
Table 9-1. Port Pin Configurations  
DDxn  
PORTxn  
PUD (in MCUCR)  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
X
0
Input  
Input  
Yes  
No  
Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
1
Input  
X
X
Output  
Output  
No  
Output low (sink)  
No  
Output high (source)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
45  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
9.2.4 Reading the Pin Value  
Independent of the setting of data direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the PINxn register bit. As shown in  
Figure 9-2 on page 44, the PINxn register bit and the preceding latch constitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid  
metastability if the physical pin changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 9-3  
shows a timing diagram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value. The maximum and minimum  
propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min respectively.  
Figure 9-3. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin Value  
System CLK  
Instructions  
SYNC Latch  
PINxn  
XXX  
XXX  
in r17, PINx  
r17  
0x00  
0xFF  
tpd, max  
tpd, min  
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch is closed when the clock is  
low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal  
value is latched when the system clock goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn register at the succeeding positive clock edge.  
As indicated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be delayed between ½ and 1½  
system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.  
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indicated in Figure 9-4. The out  
instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the  
synchronizer is one system clock period.  
Figure 9-4. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value  
System CLK  
r16  
Instructions  
SYNC Latch  
PINxn  
0xFF  
out PORTx, r16  
nop  
in r17, PINx  
r17  
0x00  
0xFF  
tpd  
46  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define the port pins from 4 to 5 as  
input with a pull-up assigned to port pin 4. The resulting pin values are read back again, but as previously discussed, a nop  
instruction is included to be able to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.  
Assembly Code Example(1)  
...  
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high  
; Define directions for port pins  
ldi  
ldi  
out  
out  
r16,(1<<PB4)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0)  
r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)  
PORTB,r16  
DDRB,r17  
; Insert nop for synchronization  
nop  
; Read port pins  
in  
r16,PINB  
...  
C Code Example  
unsigned char i;  
...  
/* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */  
/* Define directions for port pins */  
PORTB = (1<<PB4)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0);  
DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0);  
/* Insert nop for synchronization*/  
_NOP();  
/* Read port pins */  
i = PINB;  
...  
Note:  
1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull-ups are set on pins  
0, 1 and 4, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3 as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as  
strong high drivers.  
9.2.5 Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes  
As shown in Figure 9-2, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the input of the schmitt-trigger. The signal  
denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU sleep controller in power-down mode, power-save mode, and standby mode  
to avoid high power consumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close to VCC/2.  
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt request is not enabled, SLEEP  
is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various other alternate functions as described in Section 9.3  
“Alternate Port Functions” on page 48.  
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as “interrupt on rising edge, falling  
edge, or any logic change on pin” while the external interrupt is not enabled, the corresponding external interrupt flag will be  
set when resuming from the above mentioned sleep mode, as the clamping in these sleep mode produces the requested  
logic change.  
9.2.6 Unconnected Pins  
If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even though most of the digital  
inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above, floating inputs should be avoided to reduce current  
consumption in all other modes where the digital inputs are enabled (reset, active mode and idle mode).  
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up. In this case, the pull-up will  
be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is important, it is recommended to use an external pull-up or  
pulldown. Connecting unused pins directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this may cause excessive currents if  
the pin is accidentally configured as an output.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
47  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
9.3  
Alternate Port Functions  
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 9-5 shows how the port pin control  
signals from the simplified Figure 9-2 can be overridden by alternate functions. The overriding signals may not be present in  
all port pins, but the figure serves as a generic description applicable to all port pins in the AVR® microcontroller family.  
Figure 9-5. Alternate Port Functions(1)  
PUOExn  
1
0
PUOVxn  
PUD  
DDOExn  
DDOVxn  
1
0
Q
Q
D
DDxn  
CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
RESET  
PVOExn  
PVOVxn  
1
0
Pxn  
1
Q
D
0
PORTxn  
PTOExn  
Q
DIEOExn  
DIEOVxn  
SLEEP  
CLR  
1
0
RESET  
WRx  
WPx  
RRx  
RPx  
Synchronizer  
SET  
D
L
Q
Q
D
Q
Q
PINxn  
CLR  
CLR  
CLKI/O  
DIxn  
AIOxn  
PUOExn:  
PUOVxn:  
DDOExn:  
DDOVxn:  
PVOExn:  
PVOVxn:  
DIEOExn:  
DIEOVxn:  
SLEEP:  
Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE  
Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE  
Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE  
Pxn DIGITAL INPUT ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Pxn DIGITAL INPUT ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE  
SLEEP CONTROL  
PUD:  
WDx:  
RDx:  
RRx:  
WRx:  
RPx:  
WPx:  
CLK:I/O  
DIxn:  
AIOxn:  
PULL-UP DISABLE  
WRITE DDRx  
READ DDRx  
READ PORTx REGISTER  
WRITE PORTx  
READ PORTx PIN  
WRITE PINx  
I/O CLOCK  
DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
PTOExn:  
Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Note:  
1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD  
are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin.  
48  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 9-2 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port indexes from Figure 9-5 on page 48 are not  
shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding signals are generated internally in the modules having the alternate function.  
Table 9-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions  
Signal Name  
Full Name  
Description  
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the PUOV signal. If  
PUOE  
Pull-up Override Enable this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled when  
{DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010.  
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV is set/cleared,  
regardless of the setting of the DDxn, PORTxn, and PUD register bits.  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
Pull-up override value  
Data direction override If this signal is set, the output driver enable is controlled by the DDOV signal.  
enable If this signal is cleared, the output driver is enabled by the DDxn register bit.  
Data direction override If DDOE is set, the output driver is enabled/disabled when DDOV is  
value  
set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn register bit.  
If this signal is set and the output driver is enabled, the port value is  
controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared, and the output driver is  
enabled, the port value is controlled by the PORTxn register bit.  
Port value override  
enable  
PVOE  
If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of the setting of the  
PORTxn register bit.  
PVOV  
PTOE  
Port value override value  
Port toggle override  
enable  
If PTOE is set, the PORTxn register bit is inverted.  
If this bit is set, the digital Input Enable is controlled by the DIEOV signal. If  
this signal is cleared, the Digital Input Enable is determined by MCU state  
(Normal mode, sleep mode).  
Digital input enable  
override enable  
DIEOE  
DIEOV  
Digital input enable  
Override value  
If DIEOE is set, the digital input is enabled/disabled when DIEOV is  
set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (Normal mode, sleep mode).  
This is the digital input to alternate functions. In the figure, the signal is  
connected to the output of the schmitt-trigger but before the synchronizer.  
Unless the digital input is used as a clock source, the module with the  
alternate function will use its own synchronizer.  
DI  
Digital input  
This is the analog input/output to/from alternate functions. The signal is  
connected directly to the pad, and can be used bi-directionally.  
AIO  
Analog input/output  
The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and relate the overriding signals to the  
alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further details.  
9.3.1 MCU Control Register – MCUCR  
Bit  
7
BODS  
R/W  
0
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
BODSE  
R/W  
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bit 6 – PUD: Pull-up Disable  
When this bit is written to one, the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and PORTxn registers are  
configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See Section 9.2.1 “Configuring the Pin” on page 45 for more  
details about this feature.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
49  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
9.3.2 Alternate Functions of Port B  
The port B pins with alternate function are shown in Table 9-3.  
Table 9-3. Port B Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin  
PB5  
Alternate Function  
RESET / dW / ADC0 / PCINT5(1)  
PB4  
XTAL2 / CLKO / ADC2 / OC1B / PCINT4(2)  
XTAL1 / ADC3 / OC1B / PCINT3(3)  
PB3  
PB2  
SCK / ADC1 / T0 / USCK / SCL / INT0 / PCINT(4)  
MISO / AIN1 / OC0B / OC1A / DO / PCINT1(4)  
MOSI / AIN0 / OC0A / OC1A / DI / SDA / AREF / PCINT0(6)  
PB1  
PB0  
Notes: 1. Reset Pin, debugWIRE I/O, ADC input channel or pin change interrupt.  
2. XOSC output, divided system clock output, ADC input channel, Timer/Counter1 output compare and PWM  
output B, or pin change interrupt.  
3. XOSC input / external clock input, ADC input channel, Timer/Counter1 inverted output compare and PWM  
output B, or pin change interrupt.  
4. Serial clock input, ADC input channel, Timer/Counter clock input, USI clock (three-wire mode), USI clock  
(two-wire mode), external interrupt, or pin change interrupt.  
5. Serial data input, analog comparator negative input, Timer/Counter0 output compare and PWM Output B,  
Timer/Counter1 output compare and PWM Output A, USI data output (three-wire mode), or pin change  
interrupt.  
6. Serial data output, analog comparator positive input, Timer/Counter0 output compare and PWM output A,  
Timer/Counter1 inverted output compare and PWM output A, USI data Input (three-wire mode), USI Data  
(two-wire mode), Voltage Ref., or pin change interrupt.  
• Port B, Bit 5 - RESET/dW/ADC0/PCINT5  
RESET: External reset input is active low and enabled by unprogramming (“1”) the RSTDISBL fuse. Pull up is activated and  
output driver and digital input are deactivated when the pin is used as the RESET pin.  
dW: When the debugWIRE enable (DWEN) fuse is programmed and lock bits are unprogrammed, the debugWIRE system  
within the target device is activated. The RESET port pin is configured as a wire-AND (open-drain) bi-directional I/O pin with  
pull-up enabled and becomes the communication gateway between target and emulator.  
ADC0: Analog to digital converter, channel 0.  
PCINT5: Pin change interrupt source 5.  
• Port B, Bit 4- XTAL2/CLKO/ADC2/OC1B/PCINT4  
XTAL2: Chip clock oscillator pin 2. Used as clock pin for all chip clock sources except internal calibrated RC oscillator and  
external clock. When used as a clock pin, the pin can not be used as an I/O pin. When using internal calibrated RC oscillator  
or external clock as a chip clock sources, PB4 serves as an ordinary I/O pin.  
CLKO: The divided system clock can be output on the pin PB4. The divided system clock will be output if the CKOUT fuse is  
programmed, regardless of the PORTB4 and DDB4 settings. It will also be output during reset.  
ADC2: Analog to digital converter, channel 2.  
OC1B: Output compare match output: The PB4 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 compare match  
B when configured as an output (DDB4 set). The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
PCINT4: Pin change interrupt source 4.  
50  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
• Port B, Bit 3 - XTAL1/ADC3/OC1B/PCINT3  
XTAL1: Chip clock oscillator pin 1. Used for all chip clock sources except internal calibrated RC oscillator. When used as a  
clock pin, the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.  
ADC3: Analog to digital converter, channel 3.  
OC1B: Inverted output compare match output: The PB3 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 compare  
match B when configured as an output (DDB3 set). The OC1B pin is also the inverted output pin for the PWM mode timer  
function.  
PCINT3: Pin change interrupt source 3.  
• Port B, Bit 2 - SCK/ADC1/T0/USCK/SCL/INT0/PCINT2  
SCK: Master clock output, slave clock input pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as  
an input regardless of the setting of DDB2. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled  
by DDPB2. When the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB2 bit.  
ADC1: Analog to digital converter, channel 1.  
T0: Timer/Counter0 counter source.  
USCK: Three-wire mode universal serial interface clock.  
SCL: Two-wire mode serial clock for USI two-wire mode.  
INT0: External interrupt source 0.  
PCINT2: Pin change interrupt source 2.  
• Port B, Bit 1 - MISO/AIN1/OC0B/OC1A/DO/PCINT1  
MISO: Master data input, slave data output pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a master, this pin is configured  
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB1. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled  
by DDB1. When the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB1 bit.  
AIN1: Analog comparator negative input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up switched off to avoid the  
digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog comparator.  
OC0B: Output compare match output. The PB1 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0 compare match  
B. The PB1 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB1 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC0B pin is also the output  
pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
OC1A: Output compare match output: The PB1 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 compare match  
B when configured as an output (DDB1 set). The OC1A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
DO: Three-wire mode universal serial interface data output. Three-wire mode data output overrides PORTB1 value and it is  
driven to the port when data direction bit DDB1 is set (one). PORTB1 still enables the pull-up, if the direction is input and  
PORTB1 is set (one).  
PCINT1: Pin change interrupt source 1.  
• Port B, Bit 0 - MOSI/AIN0/OC0A/OC1A/DI/SDA/AREF/PCINT0  
MOSI: SPI master data output, slave data input for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured  
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB0. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is  
controlled by DDB0. When the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB0 bit.  
AIN0: Analog comparator positive input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up switched off to avoid the  
digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog comparator.  
OC0A: Output compare match output. The PB0 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0 compare match  
A when configured as an output (DDB0 set (one)). The OC0A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
OC1A: Inverted output compare match output: The PB0 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter1 compare  
match B when configured as an output (DDB0 set). The OC1A pin is also the inverted output pin for the PWM mode timer  
function.  
SDA: Two-wire mode serial interface data.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
51  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
AREF: External analog reference for ADC. Pull up and output driver are disabled on PB0 when the pin is used as an external  
reference or internal voltage reference with external capacitor at the AREF pin.  
DI: Data input in USI three-wire mode. USI three-wire mode does not override normal port functions, so pin must be  
configure as an input for DI function.  
PCINT0: Pin change interrupt source 0.  
Table 9-4 and Table 9-5 relate the alternate functions of port B to the overriding signals shown in Figure 9-5 on page 48.  
Table 9-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB5..PB3  
Signal Name PB5/RESET/ADC0/PCINT5  
PB4/ADC2/XTAL2/OC1B/PCINT4 PB3/ADC3/XTAL1/_OC1B/PCINT3  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
PTOE  
RSTDISBL(1) × DWEN(1)  
0
0
1
0
0
RSTDISBL(1) × DWEN(1)  
0
0
debugWire transmit  
0
0
0
0
0
OC1B enable  
_OC1B enable  
OC1B  
0
_OC1B  
0
RSTDISBL(1) + (PCINT5 × PCIE  
+ ADC0D)  
DIEOE  
PCINT4 × PCIE + ADC2D  
PCINT3 × PCIE + ADC3D  
DIEOV  
DI  
ADC0D  
ADC2D  
ADC3D  
PCINT5 input  
PCINT4 input  
ADC2 input  
PCINT3 input  
ADC3 input  
AIO  
RESET input, ADC0 input  
Note:  
1. 1 when the fuse is “0” (programmed).  
Table 9-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3..PB0  
Signal  
Name  
PB2/SCK/ADC1/T0/  
USCK/SCL/INT0/PCINT2  
PB1/MISO/DO/AIN1/  
OC1A/OC0B/PCINT1  
PB0/MOSI/DI/SDA/AIN0/AREF/_O  
C1A/OC0A/PCINT0  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
USI_TWO_WIRE  
USI_TWO_WIRE  
(USI_SCL_HOLD + PORTB2) ×  
DDB2  
DDOV  
PVOE  
0
(SDA + PORTBO) × DDB0  
OC0B enable + OC1A enable +  
USI_THREE_WIRE  
OC0A enable + _OC1A enable +  
(USI_TWO_WIRE × DDB0)  
USI_TWO_WIRE × DDB2  
PVOV  
PTOE  
DIEOE  
DIEOV  
0
OC0B + OC1A + DO  
0
OC0A + _OC1A  
USITC  
0
PCINT2 × PCIE + ADC1D + USISIE PCINT1 × PCIE + AIN1D  
PCINT0 × PCIE + AIN0D + USISIE  
ADC1D  
AIN1D  
AIN0D  
T0/USCK/SCL/INT0/  
PCINT2 input  
DI  
PCINT1 input  
DI/SDA/PCINT0 input  
AIO  
ADC1 input  
Analog comparator negative input Analog comparator positive input  
52  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
9.4  
Register Description for I/O-Ports  
9.4.1 Port B Data Register – PORTB  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 PORTB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
9.4.2 Port B Data Direction Register – DDRB  
Bit  
7
6
5
DDB5  
R/W  
0
4
DDB4  
R/W  
0
3
DDB3  
R/W  
0
2
DDB2  
R/W  
0
1
DDB1  
R/W  
0
0
DDB0  
R/W  
0
DDRB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
9.4.3 Port B Input Pins Address – PINB  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PINB5  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB4  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB3  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB2  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB1  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB0  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
53  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
10. External Interrupts  
The external interrupts are triggered by the INT0 pin or any of the PCINT5..0 pins. Observe that, if enabled, the interrupts will  
trigger even if the INT0 or PCINT5..0 pins are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of generating a software  
interrupt. Pin change interrupts PCI will trigger if any enabled PCINT5..0 pin toggles. The PCMSK register control which pins  
contribute to the pin change interrupts. Pin change interrupts on PCINT5..0 are detected asynchronously. This implies that  
these interrupts can be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than idle mode.  
The INT0 interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is set up as indicated in the specification  
for the MCU control register – MCUCR. When the INT0 interrupt is enabled and is configured as level triggered, the interrupt  
will trigger as long as the pin is held low. Note that recognition of falling or rising edge interrupts on INT0 requires the  
presence of an I/O clock, described in Section 5.1 “Clock Systems and their Distribution” on page 19. Low level interrupt on  
INT0 is detected asynchronously. This implies that this interrupt can be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other  
than idle mode. The I/O clock is halted in all sleep modes except idle mode.  
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from power-down, the required level must be held long enough for  
the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If the level disappears before the end of the start-up time, the  
MCU will still wake up, but no interrupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the SUT and CKSEL fuses as  
described in Section 5. “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 19.  
10.1 MCU Control Register – MCUCR  
The external interrupt control register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control.  
Bit  
7
BODS  
R/W  
0
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
BODSE  
R/W  
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bits 1, 0 – ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0  
The external interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt mask are set.  
The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 10-1. The value on the INT0 pin  
is sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will  
generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low  
level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt.  
Table 10-1. Interrupt 0 Sense Control  
ISC01  
ISC00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
10.2 General Interrupt Mask Register – GIMSK  
Bit  
7
6
5
PCIE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
0
INT0  
R/W  
0
GIMSK  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 4..0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
54  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
• Bit 6 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable  
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is enabled.  
The interrupt sense control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the MCU control register (MCUCR) define whether the external  
interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt  
request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of external interrupt request 0 is executed from  
the INT0 interrupt vector.  
• Bit 5 – PCIE: Pin Change Interrupt Enable  
When the PCIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt is enabled. Any  
change on any enabled PCINT5..0 pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of pin change interrupt request is  
executed from the PCI interrupt vector. PCINT5..0 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK0 register.  
10.3 General Interrupt Flag Register – GIFR  
Bit  
7
6
INTF0  
R/W  
0
5
PCIF  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
0
GIFR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 4..0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 6 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0  
When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG  
and the INT0 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when  
the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared  
when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt.  
• Bit 5 – PCIF: Pin Change Interrupt Flag  
When a logic change on any PCINT5..0 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and  
the PCIE bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding interrupt vector. The flag is cleared when the  
interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.  
10.4 Pin Change Mask Register – PCMSK  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0  
PCMSK  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
• Bits 7, 6 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 5..0 – PCINT5..0: Pin Change Enable Mask 5..0  
Each PCINT5..0 bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT5..0 is set and the  
PCIE bit in GIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT5..0 is cleared, pin change  
interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
55  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
11. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM  
Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module, with two independent output compare units, and with  
PWM support. It allows accurate program execution timing (event management) and wave generation. The main features  
are:  
Two independent output compare units  
Double buffered output compare registers  
Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)  
Glitch free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)  
Variable PWM period  
Frequency generator  
Three independent interrupt sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B)  
11.1 Overview  
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 11-1. For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to  
Figure 1 on page 2. CPU accessible I/O registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O  
register and bit locations are listed in Section 11.8 “8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description” on page 66.  
Figure 11-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram  
TOVn (Int. Req.)  
Count  
Clock Select  
Clear  
Direction  
Control Logic  
Edge  
Detector  
Tn  
clkTn  
(from Prescaler)  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
Timer/Counter  
TCNTn  
=
= 0  
OCnA (Int. Req.)  
Waveform  
Generation  
OCnA  
=
OCRnA  
Fixed  
TOP  
Value  
OCnB (Int. Req.)  
Waveform  
Generation  
OCnB  
=
OCRnB  
TCCRnA  
TCCRnB  
56  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
11.1.1 Registers  
The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and output compare registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are 8-bit registers. Interrupt request  
(abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the timer interrupt flag register (TIFR). All interrupts are  
individually masked with the timer interrupt mask register (TIMSK). TIFR and TIMSK are not shown in the figure.  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the T0 pin. The clock select  
logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The  
Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the clock select logic is referred to as the timer  
clock (clkT0).  
The double buffered output compare registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) is compared with the Timer/Counter value at all times.  
The result of the compare can be used by the waveform generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the  
output compare pins (OC0A and OC0B). See Section 11.4 “Output Compare Unit” on page 58 for details. The compare  
match event will also set the compare flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which can be used to generate an output compare interrupt  
request.  
11.1.2 Definitions  
Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter  
number, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the output compare unit, in this case compare unit A or compare unit B.  
However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing  
Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on.  
The definitions below are also used extensively throughout the document.  
Table 11-1. Definitions  
Parameter  
BOTTOM  
MAX  
Definition  
The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00.  
The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).  
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count sequence. The  
TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A register.  
The assignment is dependent on the mode of operation.  
TOP  
11.2 Timer/Counter Clock Sources  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the clock  
select logic which is controlled by the clock select (CS02:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter control register (TCCR0B). For  
details on clock sources and prescaler, see Section 12. “Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 72.  
11.3 Counter Unit  
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 11-2 shows a block diagram  
of the counter and its surroundings.  
Figure 11-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram  
TOVn  
(Int. Req.)  
DATA BUS  
Clock Select  
count  
Edge  
Tn  
clkTn  
Detector  
clear  
TCNTn  
Control Logic  
direction  
(from Prescaler)  
bottom  
top  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
57  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Signal description (internal signals):  
count  
direction  
clear  
Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1.  
Select between increment and decrement.  
Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).  
clkTn  
Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT0 in the following.  
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.  
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).  
top  
bottom  
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock (clkT0).  
clkT0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the clock select bits (CS02:0). When no clock  
source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of  
whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations.  
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in the Timer/Counter control  
register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter control register B (TCCR0B). There are close  
connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the output compare output  
OC0A. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation,  
see Section 11.6 “Modes of Operation” on page 61.  
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM01:0 bits. TOV0 can  
be used for generating a CPU interrupt.  
11.4 Output Compare Unit  
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the output compare registers (OCR0A and OCR0B). Whenever  
TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the output compare flag (OCF0A or  
OCF0B) at the next timer clock cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the output compare flag generates an output  
compare interrupt. The output compare flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the flag  
can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The waveform generator uses the match signal to  
generate an output according to operating mode set by the WGM02:0 bits and compare output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The  
max and bottom signals are used by the waveform generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some  
modes of operation (see Section 11.6 “Modes of Operation” on page 61).  
Figure 11-3 shows a block diagram of the output compare unit.  
Figure 11-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram  
DATA BUS  
OCRnx  
TCNTn  
= (8-bit Comparator)  
OCFnx (Int. Req.)  
OCnx  
top  
bottom  
FOCn  
Waveform Generator  
WGMn1:0  
COMnx1:0  
58  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
The OCR0x registers are double buffered when using any of the pulse width modulation (PWM) modes. For the normal and  
clear timer on compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the  
update of the OCR0x compare registers to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the  
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.  
The OCR0x register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the CPU has  
access to the OCR0x buffer register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR0x directly.  
11.4.1 Force Output Compare  
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to the force  
output compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF0x flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin  
will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM0x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC0x pin is set,  
cleared or toggled).  
11.4.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write  
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 register will block any compare match that occur in the next timer clock cycle, even  
when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an  
interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.  
11.4.3 Using the Output Compare Unit  
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are risks  
involved when changing TCNT0 when using the output compare unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running  
or not. If the value written to TCNT0 equals the OCR0x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect  
waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is down-counting.  
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the data direction register for the port pin to output. The easiest  
way of setting the OC0x value is to use the force output compare (FOC0x) strobe bits in normal mode. The OC0x registers  
keep their values even when changing between waveform generation modes.  
Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the COM0x1:0 bits will  
take effect immediately.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
59  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
11.5 Compare Match Output Unit  
The compare output mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The waveform generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits for  
defining the output compare (OC0x) state at the next compare match. Also, the COM0x1:0 bits control the OC0x pin output  
source. Figure 11-4 on page 60 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x1:0 bit setting. The I/O  
registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O port control registers (DDR  
and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC0x state, the reference is for the  
internal OC0x register, not the OC0x pin. If a system reset occur, the OC0x register is reset to “0”.  
Figure 11-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic  
COMnx1  
COMnx0  
FOCn  
Waveform  
Generator  
D
D
Q
Q
1
0
OCn  
Pin  
OCnx  
PORT  
D
Q
DDR  
clkI/O  
The general I/O port function is overridden by the output compare (OC0x) from the waveform generator if either of the  
COM0x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the data direction register  
(DDR) for the port pin. The Data direction register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as output before the OC0x  
value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the waveform generation mode.  
The design of the output compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the output is enabled. Note that  
some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See Section 11.8 “8-bit Timer/Counter Register  
Description” on page 66  
11.5.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation  
The waveform generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes, setting the  
COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the waveform generator that no action on the OC0x register is to be performed on the next compare  
match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 11-2 on page 66. For fast PWM mode, refer to  
Table 11-3 on page 67, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 11-4 on page 67.  
A change of the COM0x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-PWM  
modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC0x strobe bits.  
60  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
11.6 Modes of Operation  
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the output compare pins, is defined by the combination of  
the waveform generation mode (WGM02:0) and compare output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The compare output mode bits do  
not affect the counting sequence, while the waveform generation mode bits do. The COM0x1:0 bits control whether the  
PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM0x1:0 bits  
control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare match (see Section 11.5 “Compare Match Output  
Unit” on page 60).  
For detailed timing information refer to Figure 11-8 on page 65, Figure 11-9 on page 65, Figure 11-10 on page 65 and  
Figure 11-11 on page 66 in Section 11.7 “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 65.  
11.6.1 Normal Mode  
The simplest mode of operation is the normal mode (WGM02:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always up  
(incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value  
(TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) will be  
set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except  
that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV0 flag,  
the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to consider in the normal mode, a new counter  
value can be written anytime.  
The output compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the output compare to generate  
waveforms in normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time.  
11.6.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode  
In clear timer on compare or CTC mode (WGM02:0 = 2), the OCR0A register is used to manipulate the counter resolution. In  
CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A defines the top  
value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It  
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.  
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 11-5 on page 61. The counter value (TCNT0) increases until a  
compare match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then counter (TCNT0) is cleared.  
Figure 11-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set  
TCNTn  
OCn  
(COMnx1:0 = 1)  
(Toggle)  
1
2
3
4
Period  
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF0A flag. If the interrupt  
is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to  
BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does  
not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the current value of TCNT0, the  
counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around  
starting at 0x00 before the compare match can occur.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
61  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each compare  
match by setting the compare output mode bits to toggle mode (COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the  
port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of  
f
OC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following equation:  
fclk_I/O  
---------------------------------------------------  
=
fOCnx  
2 × N × (1 + OCRnx)  
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
As for the normal mode of operation, the TOV0 flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts from MAX to  
0x00.  
11.6.3 Fast PWM Mode  
The fast pulse width modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency PWM waveform  
generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from  
BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 7.  
In non-inverting compare output mode, the output compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and  
OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting compare output mode, the output is set on compare match and cleared at  
BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the  
phase correct PWM mode that use dual-slope operation.  
This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High  
frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.  
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value. The counter is then cleared at  
the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 11-6 on page 62. The TCNT0  
value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes  
non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches  
between OCR0x and TCNT0.  
Figure 11-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCRnx Interrupt  
Flag Set  
OCRnx Update and  
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set  
TCNTn  
(COMnx1:0 = 2)  
OCn  
OCn  
(COMnx1:0 = 3)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Period  
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt  
handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.  
62  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to  
two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three:  
Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to one allows the AC0A pin to toggle on compare matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is  
not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 11-3 on page 67). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on the port pin if the  
data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0x register at  
the compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the OC0x register at the timer clock cycle the  
counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).  
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:  
fclk_I/O  
-------------------  
=
fOCnxPWM  
N × 256  
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
The extreme values for the OCR0A register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the fast  
PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle.  
Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by  
the COM0A1:0 bits.)  
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC0x to toggle its logical  
level on each compare match (COM0x1:0 = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2  
when OCR0A is set to zero. This feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the  
output compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.  
11.6.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode  
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation  
option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to  
TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 1, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 5.  
In non-inverting compare output mode, the output compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and  
OCR0x while up counting, and set on the compare match while down-counting. In inverting output compare mode, the  
operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation.  
However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control  
applications.  
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP. When the counter reaches  
TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for  
the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 11-7 on page 64. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a  
histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small  
horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
63  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Figure 11-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCnx Interrupt  
Flag Set  
OCRnx Update  
TOVn Interrupt  
Flag Set  
TCNTn  
(COMnx1:0 = 2)  
OCn  
OCn  
(COMnx1:0 = 3)  
1
2
3
Period  
The Timer/Counter overflow flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The interrupt flag can be used to  
generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value.  
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the  
COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the  
COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on compare matches if the WGM02 bit is  
set. This option is not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 11-4 on page 67). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on  
the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the  
OC0x register at the compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the  
OC0x register at compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the  
output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:  
fclk_I/O  
-------------------  
=
fOCnxPCPWM  
N × 510  
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
The extreme values for the OCR0A register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in the phase  
correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the  
output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic  
values.  
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 11-7 on page 64 OCn has a transition from high to low even though there is no compare  
match. The point of this transition is to guaratee symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition  
without compare match.  
OCR0A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 11-7 on page 64. When the OCR0A value is MAX the OCn pin  
value is the same as the result of a down-counting compare match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn  
value at MAX must correspond to the result of an up-counting compare match.  
The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0A, and for that reason misses the compare match  
and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way up.  
64  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
11.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams  
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal in the  
following figures. The figures include information on when interrupt flags are set. Figure 11-8 contains timing data for basic  
Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase  
correct PWM mode.  
Figure 11-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/1)  
TCNTn  
TOVn  
MAX - 1  
MAX  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM + 1  
Figure 11-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.  
Figure 11-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/8)  
TCNTn  
TOVn  
MAX - 1  
MAX  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM + 1  
Figure 11-10 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC mode and PWM mode, where  
OCR0A is TOP.  
Figure 11-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/8)  
TCNTn  
OCRnx - 1  
OCRnx  
OCRnx + 1  
OCRnx + 2  
OCRnx  
OCFnx  
OCRnx Value  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
65  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 11-11 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and fast PWM mode where OCR0A is  
TOP.  
Figure 11-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/8)  
TCNTn  
(CTC)  
TOP - 1  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM + 1  
OCRnx  
TOP  
OCFnx  
11.8 8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description  
11.8.1 Timer/Counter Control Register A – TCCR0A  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0  
R
0
WGM01 WGM00 TCCR0A  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bits 7:6 – COM01A:0: Compare Match Output A Mode  
These bits control the output compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A1:0 bits are set, the OC0A output  
overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the data direction register (DDR)  
bit corresponding to the OC0A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.  
When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 11-2  
shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).  
Table 11-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.  
Toggle OC0A on compare match  
Clear OC0A on compare match  
Set OC0A on compare match  
66  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
Table 11-3 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode.  
Table 11-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.  
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A disconnected.  
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on compare match.  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC0A on compare match, set OC0A at TOP  
Set OC0A on compare match, clear OC0A at TOP  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the compare match is  
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 11.6.3 “Fast PWM Mode” on page 62 for more  
details.  
Table 11-4 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode.  
Table 11-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)  
COM0A1  
COM0A0  
Description  
0
0
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.  
WGM02 = 0: Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.  
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on compare match.  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC0A on compare match when up-counting. Set OC0A on compare match when  
down-counting.  
Set OC0A on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on compare match when  
down-counting.  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the compare match is  
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 11.6.4 “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 63 for  
more details.  
• Bits 5:4 – COM0B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode  
These bits control the output compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the COM0B1:0 bits are set, the OC0B output  
overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the data direction register (DDR)  
bit corresponding to the OC0B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.  
When OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B1:0 bits depends on the WGM02:0 bit setting.  
Table 11-2 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).  
Table 11-5. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.  
Toggle OC0B on compare match  
Clear OC0B on compare match  
Set OC0B on compare match  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
67  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Table 11-3 on page 67 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to fast PWM mode.  
Table 11-6. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.  
Reserved  
Clear OC0B on compare match, set OC0B at TOP  
Set OC0B on compare match, clear OC0B at TOP  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the compare match is  
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 11.6.3 “Fast PWM Mode” on page 62 for more  
details.  
Table 11-4 on page 67 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct PWM mode.  
Table 11-7. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)  
COM0A1  
COM0A0  
Description  
0
0
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.  
Reserved  
Clear OC0B on compare match when up-counting. Set OC0B on compare match when  
down-counting.  
1
1
0
1
Set OC0B on compare match when up-counting. Clear OC0B on compare match when  
down-counting.  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the compare match is  
ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See Section 11.6.4 “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 63 for  
more details.  
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 1:0 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode  
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the  
source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see Table 11-8 on page 68.  
Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), clear timer on compare match (CTC)  
mode, and two types of pulse width modulation (PWM) modes (see Section 11.6 “Modes of Operation” on page 61).  
Table 11-8. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description  
Timer/Counter Mode of  
WGM0 Operation  
Update of  
OCRx at  
TOV Flag  
Set on(1)(2)  
Mode  
WGM2  
WGM1  
TOP  
0xFF  
0xFF  
OCRA  
0xFF  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Normal  
Immediate  
TOP  
MAX  
BOTTOM  
MAX  
PWM, phase correct  
CTC  
Immediate  
TOP  
Fast PWM  
MAX  
Reserved  
PWM, phase correct  
Reserved  
OCRA  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
Fast PWM  
OCRA  
TOP  
TOP  
Notes: 1. MAX  
= 0xFF  
2. BOTTOM = 0x00  
68  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
11.8.2 Timer/Counter Control Register B – TCCR0B  
Bit  
7
FOC0A  
W
6
FOC0B  
W
5
4
3
WGM02  
R/W  
0
2
CS02  
R/W  
0
1
CS01  
R/W  
0
0
CS00  
R/W  
0
TCCR0B  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
0
0
• Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A  
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.  
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when operating  
in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform  
generation unit. The OC0A output is changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0A bit is  
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced  
compare.  
A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0A as TOP.  
The FOC0A bit is always read as zero.  
• Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B  
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.  
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when operating  
in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the waveform  
generation unit. The OC0B output is changed according to its COM0B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0B bit is  
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced  
compare.  
A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0B as TOP.  
The FOC0B bit is always read as zero.  
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode  
See the description in the Section 11.8.1 “Timer/Counter Control Register A – TCCR0A” on page 66.  
• Bits 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select  
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter.  
Table 11-9. Clock Select Bit Description  
CS02  
CS01  
CS00  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)  
clkI/O/(no prescaling)  
clkI/O/8 (from prescaler)  
clkI/O/64 (from prescaler)  
clkI/O/256 (from prescaler)  
clkI/O/1024 (from prescaler)  
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge.  
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge.  
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is  
configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
69  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
11.8.3 Timer/Counter Register – TCNT0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCNT0[7:0]  
R/W R/W  
TCNT0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
0
The Timer/Counter register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter.  
writing to the TCNT0 register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter  
(TCNT0) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a compare match between TCNT0 and the OCR0x  
registers.  
11.8.4 Output Compare Register A – OCR0A  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCR0A[7:0]  
R/W R/W  
OCR0A  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
0
The output compare register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT0). A  
match can be used to generate an output compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin.  
11.8.5 Output Compare Register B – OCR0B  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCR0B[7:0]  
R/W R/W  
OCR0B  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
0
The output compare register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value (TCNT0). A  
match can be used to generate an output compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin.  
11.8.6 Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register – TIMSK  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
TOIE1  
R/W  
0
1
TOIE0  
R/W  
0
0
OCIE1A OCIE1B OCIE0A OCIE0B  
TIMSK  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
R
0
• Bits 7..4, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter compare match B interrupt  
is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is  
set in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register – TIFR0.  
• Bit 2 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter0 compare match A  
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the  
OCF0A bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 interrupt flag register – TIFR0.  
• Bit 1 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter0 overflow interrupt is  
enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in  
the Timer/Counter 0 interrupt flag register – TIFR0.  
70  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
 
11.8.7 Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR  
Bit  
7
6
OCF1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCF1B  
R/W  
0
4
OCF0A  
R/W  
0
3
OCF0B  
R/W  
0
2
TOV1  
R/W  
0
1
TOV0  
R/W  
0
0
TIFR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 4– OCF0A: Output Compare Flag 0 A  
The OCF0A bit is set when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data in OCR0A – output compare  
register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A  
is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 compare match interrupt  
enable), and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 compare match interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 3 – OCF0B: Output Compare Flag 0 B  
The OCF0B bit is set when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter and the data in OCR0B – output compare  
register0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,  
OCF0B is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter compare B match  
interrupt enable), and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter compare match interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 1 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware when executing the  
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the  
SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 overflow interrupt enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 overflow interrupt is  
executed.  
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM02:0 bit setting. Refer to Table 11-8 on page 68, Section 11-8 “Waveform  
Generation Mode Bit Description” on page 68.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
71  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
12. Timer/Counter Prescaler  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn2:0 = 1). This provides the fastest  
operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to system clock frequency (fCLK_I/O). Alternatively, one of  
four taps from the prescaler can be used as a clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either fCLK_I/O/8,  
f
CLK_I/O/64, fCLK_I/O/256, or fCLK_I/O/1024.  
12.1 Prescaler Reset  
The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the clock select logic of the Timer/Counter. Since the prescaler  
is not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the state of the prescaler will have implications for situations where a  
prescaled clock is used. One example of prescaling artifacts occurs when the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler  
(6 > CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1  
to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution.  
12.2 External Clock Source  
An external clock source applied to the T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkT0). The T0 pin is sampled once every  
system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed through the edge  
detector. Figure 12-1 shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the T0 synchronization and edge detector logic. The  
registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is transparent in the high period of  
the internal system clock.  
The edge detector generates one clkT0 pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative (CSn2:0 = 6) edge it detects.  
Figure 12-1. T0 Pin Sampling  
Tn_sync  
Tn  
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
(to Clock  
Select Logic)  
LE  
clkI/O  
Synchronization  
Edge Detector  
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles from an edge has been  
applied to the T0 pin to the counter is updated.  
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T0 has been stable for at least one system clock cycle,  
otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.  
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to ensure correct sampling. The  
external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty  
cycle. Since the edge detector uses sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling  
frequency (nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency and duty cycle caused by  
oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is recommended that maximum frequency of an external  
clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.  
An external clock source can not be prescaled.  
72  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Figure 12-2. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0  
clkI/O  
10-bit T/C Prescaler  
Clear  
PSR10  
T0  
Synchronization  
0
CS00  
CS01  
CS02  
Timer/Counter 0 Clock Source  
clkT0  
Note:  
1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T0) is shown in Figure 12-1.  
12.2.1 General Timer/Counter Control Register – GTCCR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSR0  
R/W  
0
TSM  
R/W  
0
PWM1B COM1B1 COM1B0 FOC1B FOC1A PSR1  
GTCCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode  
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter synchronization mode. In this mode, the value that is written to the  
PSR0 bit is kept, hence keeping the prescaler reset signal asserted. This ensures that the Timer/Counter is halted and can  
be configured without the risk of advancing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSR0 bit is cleared  
by hardware, and the Timer/Counter start counting.  
• Bit 0 – PSR0: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter0  
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware, except  
if the TSM bit is set.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
73  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
13. Counter and Compare Units  
Figure 13-1 shows the Timer/Counter1 prescaler that supports two clocking modes, a synchronous clocking mode and an  
asynchronous clocking mode. The synchronous clocking mode uses the system clock (CK) as the clock timebase and  
asynchronous mode uses the fast peripheral clock (PCK) as the clock time base. The PCKE bit from the PLLCSR register  
enables the asynchronous mode when it is set (‘1’).  
Figure 13-1. Timer/Counter1 Prescaler  
PSR1  
PCKE  
CK  
S
A
T1CK  
14-bit T/C Prescaler  
PCK 64/32MHz  
0
CS10  
CS11  
CS12  
CS13  
Timer/Counter 1 Count Enable  
In the asynchronous clocking mode the clock selections are from PCK to PCK/16384 and stop, and in the synchronous  
clocking mode the clock selections are from CK to CK/16384 and stop. The clock options are described in Table 13-2 on  
page 78 and the Timer/Counter1 control register, TCCR1. Setting the PSR1 bit in GTCCR register resets the prescaler. The  
PCKE bit in the PLLCSR register enables the asynchronous mode. The frequency of the fast peripheral clock is 64MHz (or  
32MHz in low speed mode).  
13.1 Timer/Counter1  
The Timer/Counter1 general operation is described in the asynchronous mode and the operation in the synchronous mode  
is mentioned only if there are differences between these two modes. Figure 13-2 shows Timer/Counter 1 synchronization  
register block diagram and synchronization delays in between registers. Note that all clock gating details are not shown in  
the figure. The Timer/Counter1 register values go through the internal synchronization registers, which cause the input  
synchronization delay, before affecting the counter operation. The registers TCCR1, GTCCR, OCR1A, OCR1B, and OCR1C  
can be read back right after writing the register. The read back values are delayed for the Timer/Counter1 (TCNT1) register  
and flags (OCF1A, OCF1B, and TOV1), because of the input and output synchronization.  
The Timer/Counter1 features a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with the lower prescaling opportunities. It can also  
support two accurate, high speed, 8-bit pulse width modulators using clock speeds up to 64MHz (or 32MHz in low speed  
mode). In this mode, Timer/Counter1 and the output compare registers serve as dual stand-alone PWMs with  
non-overlapping non-inverted and inverted outputs. Refer to Section 13.1.11 “Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode” on page 82 for  
a detailed description on this function. Similarly, the high prescaling opportunities make this unit useful for lower speed  
functions or exact timing functions with infrequent actions.  
74  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Figure 13-2. Timer/Counter 1 Synchronization Register Block Diagram  
8-bit Data Bus  
IO Registers  
Input Synchronization  
Registers  
Timer/Counter1  
Output Synchronization  
Registers  
OCR1A  
OCR1B  
OCR1C  
TCCR1  
GTCCR  
OCR1A_SI  
OCR1B_SI  
OCR1C_SI  
TCCR1_SI  
GTCCR_SI  
TCNT1  
TCNT_SO  
OCF1A_SO  
OCF1B_SO  
TOV1_SO  
OCF1A  
OCF1B  
TOV1  
TCNT1  
TCNT1  
OCF1A  
OCF1B  
TOV1  
TCNT1_SI  
OCF1A_SI  
OCF1B_SI  
TOV1_SI  
PCKE  
CK  
S
A
S
A
PCK  
SYNC  
MODE  
1/2 CK Delay  
1-2 CK Delay  
1 CK Delay  
1 CK Delay  
1/2 CK Delay  
No Delay  
1 PCK Delay  
~1 CK Delay  
ASYNC  
MODE  
Timer/Counter1 and the prescaler allow running the CPU from any clock source while the prescaler is operating on the fast  
64MHz (or 32MHz in low speed mode) PCK clock in the asynchronous mode.  
Note that the system clock frequency must be lower than one third of the PCK frequency. The synchronization mechanism of  
the asynchronous Timer/Counter1 needs at least two edges of the PCK when the system clock is high. If the frequency of  
the system clock is too high, it is a risk that data or control values are lost.  
The following Figure 13-3 on page 76 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter1.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
75  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 13-3. Timer/Counter1 Block Diagram  
T/C1  
Overflow  
IRQ  
T/C1  
T/C1  
Compare  
Compare  
OC1A  
(PB1)  
OC1A  
(PB0)  
OC1B  
(PB4)  
OC1B  
(PB3)  
Match A IRQ Match B IRQ  
Dead Time Generator  
Dead Time Generator  
Timer Int. Mask  
Register (TIMSK)  
Timer Int. Flag  
Register (TIFR)  
T/C Control  
Register 1 (TCCR1)  
Global T/C Control  
Register (GTCCR)  
Timer/Counter1  
CK  
T/C Clear  
Timer/Counter1  
(TCNT1)  
Timer/Counter1 Control Logic  
PCK  
8-bit Comparator  
8-bit Comparator  
8-bit Comparator  
T/C1 Output  
Compare Register  
(OCR1A)  
T/C1 Output  
Compare Register  
(OCR1B)  
T/C1 Output  
Compare Register  
(OCR1C)  
8-bit Databus  
Three status flags (overflow and compare matches) are found in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register - TIFR. control  
signals are found in the Timer/Counter control registers TCCR1 and GTCCR. The interrupt enable/disable settings are found  
in the Timer/Counter interrupt mask register - TIMSK.  
The Timer/Counter1 contains three output compare registers, OCR1A, OCR1B, and OCR1C as the data source to be  
compared with the Timer/Counter1 contents. In normal mode the output compare functions are operational with all three  
output compare registers. OCR1A determines action on the OC1A pin (PB1), and it can generate timer1 OC1A interrupt in  
normal mode and in PWM mode. Likewise, OCR1B determines action on the OC1B pin (PB3) and it can generate timer1  
OC1B interrupt in normal mode and in PWM mode. OCR1C holds the Timer/Counter maximum value, i.e. the clear on  
compare match value. In the normal mode an overflow interrupt (TOV1) is generated when Timer/Counter1 counts from $FF  
to $00, while in the PWM mode the overflow interrupt is generated when Timer/Counter1 counts either from $FF to $00 or  
from OCR1C to $00. The inverted PWM outputs OC1A and OC1B are not connected in normal mode.  
In PWM mode, OCR1A and OCR1B provide the data values against which the timer counter value is compared. Upon  
compare match the PWM outputs (OC1A, OC1A, OC1B, OC1B) are generated. In PWM mode, the timer counter counts up  
to the value specified in the output compare register OCR1C and starts again from $00. This feature allows limiting the  
counter “full” value to a specified value, lower than $FF. Together with the many prescaler options, flexible PWM frequency  
selection is provided. Table 13-6 on page 84 lists clock selection and OCR1C values to obtain PWM frequencies from 20kHz  
to 250kHz in 10kHz steps and from 250kHz to 500kHz in 50kHz steps. Higher PWM frequencies can be obtained at the  
expense of resolution.  
76  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
13.1.1 Timer/Counter1 Control Register - TCCR1  
Bit  
7
CTC1  
R/W  
0
6
PWM1A  
R/W  
0
5
4
3
CS13  
R/W  
0
2
CS12  
R/W  
0
1
CS11  
R/W  
0
0
CS10  
R/W  
0
$30 ($50)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
COM1A1 COM1A0  
TCCR1  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7- CTC1: Clear Timer/Counter on Compare Match  
When the CTC1 control bit is set (one), Timer/Counter1 is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with  
OCR1C register value. If the control bit is cleared, Timer/Counter1 continues counting and is unaffected by a compare  
match.  
• Bit 6- PWM1A: Pulse Width Modulator A Enable  
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode based on comparator OCR1A in Timer/Counter1 and the counter value is reset  
to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with OCR1C register value.  
• Bits 5,4 - COM1A1, COM1A0: Comparator A Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0  
The COM1A1 and COM1A0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match with compare register A  
in Timer/Counter1. Output pin actions affect pin PB1 (OC1A). Since this is an alternative function to an I/O port, the  
corresponding direction control bit must be set (one) in order to control an output pin. Note that OC1A is not connected in  
normal mode.  
Table 13-1. Comparator A Mode Select  
COM1A1  
COM1A0  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter comparator A disconnected from output pin OC1A.  
Toggle the OC1A output line.  
Clear the OC1A output line.  
Set the OC1A output line  
In PWM mode, these bits have different functions. Refer to Table 13-4 on page 83 for a detailed description.  
• Bits 3..0 - CS13, CS12, CS11, CS10: Clock Select Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0  
The clock select bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter1.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
77  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Table 13-2. Timer/Counter1 Prescale Select  
Synchronous  
Clocking Mode  
Asynchronous  
Clocking Mode  
CS13  
CS12  
CS11  
CS10  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
T/C1 stopped  
PCK  
T/C1 stopped  
CK  
PCK/2  
CK/2  
PCK/4  
CK/4  
PCK/8  
CK/8  
PCK/16  
CK/16  
PCK/32  
CK/32  
PCK/64  
CK/64  
PCK/128  
PCK/256  
PCK/512  
PCK/1024  
PCK/2048  
PCK/4096  
PCK/8192  
PCK/16384  
CK/128  
CK/256  
CK/512  
CK/1024  
CK/2048  
CK/4096  
CK/8192  
CK/16384  
The Stop condition provides a timer enable/disable function.  
13.1.2 General Timer/Counter1 Control Register - GTCCR  
Bit  
7
6
PWM1B  
R/W  
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSR0  
R/W  
0
$2C ($4C)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
TSM  
R/W  
0
COM1B1 COM1B0  
FOC1B FOC1A  
PSR1  
R/W  
0
GTCCR  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
W
0
W
0
• Bit 6- PWM1B: Pulse Width Modulator B Enable  
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode based on comparator OCR1B in Timer/Counter1 and the counter value is reset  
to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with OCR1C register value.  
• Bits 5,4 - COM1B1, COM1B0: Comparator B Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0  
The COM1B1 and COM1B0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match with compare register B  
in Timer/Counter1. Output pin actions affect pin PB3 (OC1B). Since this is an alternative function to an I/O port, the  
corresponding direction control bit must be set (one) in order to control an output pin. Note that OC1B is not connected in  
normal mode.  
Table 13-3. Comparator B Mode Select  
COM1B1  
COM1B0  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter comparator B disconnected from output pin OC1B.  
Toggle the OC1B output line.  
Clear the OC1B output line.  
Set the OC1B output line  
In PWM mode, these bits have different functions. Refer to Table 13-4 on page 83 for a detailed description.  
78  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
• Bit 3- FOC1B: Force Output Compare Match 1B  
Writing a logical one to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PB3 (OC1B) according to the values already  
set in COM1B1 and COM1B0. If COM1B1 and COM1B0 written in the same cycle as FOC1B, the new settings will be used.  
The force output compare bit can be used to change the output pin value regardless of the timer value. The automatic action  
programmed in COM1B1 and COM1B0 takes place as if a compare match had occurred, but no interrupt is generated. The  
FOC1B bit always reads as zero. FOC1B is not in use if PWM1B bit is set.  
• Bit 2- FOC1A: Force Output Compare Match 1A  
Writing a logical one to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PB1 (OC1A) according to the values already  
set in COM1A1 and COM1A0. If COM1A1 and COM1A0 written in the same cycle as FOC1A, the new settings will be used.  
The force output compare bit can be used to change the output pin value regardless of the timer value. The automatic action  
programmed in COM1A1 and COM1A0 takes place as if a compare match had occurred, but no interrupt is generated. The  
FOC1A bit always reads as zero. FOC1A is not in use if PWM1A bit is set.  
• Bit 1- PSR1: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter1  
When this bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter prescaler (TCNT1 is unaffected) will be reset. The bit will be cleared by  
hardware after the operation is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have no effect. This bit will always read as zero.  
13.1.3 Timer/Counter1 - TCNT1  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2F ($4F)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
TCNT1  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
This 8-bit register contains the value of Timer/Counter1.  
Timer/Counter1 is realized as an up counter with read and write access. Due to synchronization of the CPU, Timer/Counter1  
data written into Timer/Counter1 is delayed by one and half CPU clock cycles in synchronous mode and at most one CPU  
clock cycles for asynchronous mode.  
13.1.4 Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterA - OCR1A  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2E ($4E)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR1A  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The output compare register A is an 8-bit read/write register.  
The Timer/Counter output compare register A contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1. Actions on  
compare matches are specified in TCCR1. A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1A value.  
A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1A to the same value does not generate a compare match.  
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag OCF1A after a synchronization delay following the compare event.  
13.1.5 Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterB - OCR1B  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2D ($4D)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR1B  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The output compare register B is an 8-bit read/write register.  
The Timer/Counter output compare register B contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1. Actions on  
compare matches are specified in TCCR1. A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1B value.  
A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1B to the same value does not generate a compare match.  
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag OCF1B after a synchronization delay following the compare event.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
79  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
13.1.6 Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterC - OCR1C  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2B ($4B)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSB  
R/W  
1
OCR1C  
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
The output compare register C is an 8-bit read/write register.  
The Timer/Counter output compare register C contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1. A compare  
match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1C value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1C to the  
same value does not generate a compare match. If the CTC1 bit in TCCR1 is set, a compare match will clear TCNT1.  
This register has the same function in normal mode and PWM mode.  
13.1.7 Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register - TIMSK  
Bit  
7
-
6
OCIE1A  
R/W  
0
5
4
3
OCIE0B  
R/W  
0
2
TOIE1  
R/W  
0
1
TOIE0  
R/W  
0
0
-
$39 ($59)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
OCIE1B OCIE0A  
TIMSK  
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R
0
• Bit 7 - Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.  
• Bit 6 - OCIE1A: Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1A bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 compare match A,  
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt at vector $003 is executed if a compare match A occurs. The compare flag  
in Timer/Counter1 is set (one) in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register.  
• Bit 5 - OCIE1B: Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1B bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 compare match B,  
interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt at vector $009 is executed if a compare match B occurs. The compare flag  
in Timer/Counter1 is set (one) in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register.  
• Bit 4– OCIE0A: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter compare match A interrupt  
is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is  
set in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register – TIFR0.  
• Bit 3 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the status register is set, the Timer/Counter compare match B interrupt  
is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is  
set in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register – TIFR0.  
• Bit 2 - TOIE1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the status register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 overflow interrupt is  
enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $004) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter1 occurs. The overflow flag  
(timer1) is set (one) in the Timer/Counter interrupt flag register - TIFR.  
• Bit 0 - Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.  
80  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
13.1.8 Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register - TIFR  
Bit  
7
-
6
OCF1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCF1B  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
TOV1  
R/W  
0
1
TOV0  
R/W  
0
0
-
$38 ($58)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
OCF0A  
OCF0B  
TIFR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 - Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.  
• Bit 6 - OCF1A: Output Compare Flag 1A  
The OCF1A bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between Timer/Counter1 and the data value in OCR1A - output  
compare register 1A. OCF1A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.  
Alternatively, OCF1A is cleared, after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG,  
OCIE1A, and OCF1A are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 A compare match interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 5 - OCF1B: Output Compare Flag 1B  
The OCF1B bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between Timer/Counter1 and the data value in OCR1B - output  
compare register 1A. OCF1B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.  
Alternatively, OCF1B is cleared, after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG,  
OCIE1B, and OCF1B are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 B compare match interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 2 - TOV1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag  
In normal mode (PWM1A=0 and PWM1B=0) the bit TOV1 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter1. The bit  
TOV1 is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV1 is cleared,  
after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logical one to the flag.  
In PWM mode (either PWM1A=1 or PWM1B=1) the bit TOV1 is set (one) when compare match occurs between  
Timer/Counter1 and data value in OCR1C - output compare register 1C. Clearing the Timer/Counter1 with the bit CTC1  
does not generate an overflow.  
When the SREG I-bit, and TOIE1 (Timer/Counter1 overflow interrupt enable), and TOV1 are set (one), the Timer/Counter1  
overflow interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 0 - Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.  
13.1.9 PLL Control and Status Register - PLLCSR  
Bit  
7
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
PCKE  
R/W  
0
1
0
$27 ($27)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
LSM  
R/W  
0
PLLE  
R/W  
0/1  
PLOCK  
PLLCSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7- LSM: Low Speed Mode  
The high speed mode is enabled as default and the fast peripheral clock is 64MHz, but the low speed mode can be set by  
writing the LSM bit to one. Then the fast peripheral clock is scaled down to 32MHz. The low speed mode must be set, if the  
supply voltage is below 2.7 volts, because the Timer/Counter1 is not running fast enough on low voltage levels. It is highly  
recommended that Timer/Counter1 is stopped whenever the LSM bit is changed.  
• Bit 6.. 3- Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 and always read as zero.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
81  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
• Bit 2- PCKE: PCK Enable  
The PCKE bit change the Timer/Counter1 clock source. When it is set, the asynchronous clock mode is enabled and fast  
64MHz (or 32MHz in low speed mode) PCK clock is used as Timer/Counter1 clock source. If this bit is cleared, the  
synchronous clock mode is enabled, and system clock CK is used as Timer/Counter1 clock source. This bit can be set only  
if PLLE bit is set. It is safe to set this bit only when the PLL is locked i.e the PLOCK bit is 1. The bit PCKE can only be set, if  
the PLL has been enabled earlier.  
• Bit 1- PLLE: PLL Enable  
When the PLLE is set, the PLL is started and if needed internal RC-oscillator is started as a PLL reference clock. If PLL is  
selected as a system clock source the value for this bit is always 1.  
• Bit 0- PLOCK: PLL Lock Detector  
When the PLOCK bit is set, the PLL is locked to the reference clock, and it is safe to enable PCK for Timer/Counter1. After  
the PLL is enabled, it takes about 100 micro seconds for the PLL to lock.  
13.1.10 Timer/Counter1 Initialization for Asynchronous Mode  
To change Timer/Counter1 to the asynchronous mode, first enable PLL, wait 100µs before polling the PLOCK bit until it is  
set, and then set the PCKE bit.  
13.1.11 Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode  
When the PWM mode is selected, Timer/Counter1 and the output compare register C - OCR1C form a dual 8-bit, free-  
running and glitch-free PWM generator with outputs on the PB1(OC1A) and PB3(OC1B) pins and inverted outputs on pins  
PB0(OC1A) and PB2(OC1B). As default non-overlapping times for complementary output pairs are zero, but they can be  
inserted using a dead time generator (see Section 14. “Dead Time Generator” on page 85).  
Figure 13-4. The PWM Output Pair  
PWM1x  
PWM1x  
tnon-overlap = 0  
tnon-overlap = 0  
x = A or B  
When the counter value match the contents of OCR1A or OCR1B, the OC1A and OC1B outputs are set or cleared according  
to the COM1A1/COM1A0 or COM1B1/COM1B0 bits in the Timer/Counter1 control register A - TCCR1, as shown in  
Table 13-4 on page 83.  
Timer/Counter1 acts as an up-counter, counting from $00 up to the value specified in the output compare register OCR1C,  
and starting from $00 up again. A compare match with OC1C will set an overflow interrupt flag (TOV1) after a  
synchronization delay following the compare event.  
82  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 13-4. Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode  
COM11  
COM10  
Effect on Output Compare Pins  
OC1x not connected.  
0
0
OC1x not connected.  
OC1x cleared on compare match. Set whenTCNT1 = $01.  
OC1x set on compare match. Cleared when TCNT1 = $00.  
OC1x cleared on compare match. Set when TCNT1 = $01.  
OC1x not connected.  
0
1
1
1
0
1
OC1x Set on compare match. Cleared when TCNT1= $01.  
OC1x not connected.  
Note that in PWM mode, writing to the output compare registers OCR1A or OCR1B, the data value is first transferred to a  
temporary location. The value is latched into OCR1A or OCR1B when the Timer/Counter reaches OCR1C. This prevents the  
occurrence of odd-length PWM pulses (glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized OCR1A or OCR1B. See Figure 13-5 for  
an example.  
Figure 13-5. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PMW Output OC1x  
Synchronized OC1x Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PMW Output OC1x  
Unsynchronized OC1x Latch  
Glitch  
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from OCR1A or OCR1B will read the contents of the  
temporary location. This means that the most recently written value always will read out of OCR1A or OCR1B.  
When OCR1A or OCR1B contain $00 or the top value, as specified in OCR1C register, the output PB1(OC1A) or  
PB3(OC1B) is held low or high according to the settings of COM1A1/COM1A0. This is shown in Table 13-5 on page 83.  
Table 13-5. PWM Outputs OCR1x = $00 or OCR1C, x = A or B  
COM1x1  
COM1x0  
OCR1x  
$00  
Output OC1x  
Output OC1x  
H
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
L
H
L
OCR1C  
$00  
L
Not connected.  
Not connected.  
Not connected.  
Not connected.  
OCR1C  
$00  
H
H
L
OCR1C  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
83  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
In PWM mode, the timer overflow flag - TOV1 is set when the TCNT1 counts to the OCR1C value and the TCNT1 is reset to  
$00. The timer overflow interrupt1 is executed when TOV1 is set provided that timer overflow interrupt and global interrupts  
are enabled. This also applies to the timer output compare flags and interrupts.  
The frequency of the PWM will be timer clock 1 frequency divided by (OCR1C value + 1). See the following equation:  
f
TCK1  
---------------------------------  
f
=
PWM  
(OCR1C + 1)  
Resolution shows how many bit is required to express the value in the OCR1C register. It is calculated by following equation  
ResolutionPWM = log2(OCR1C + 1).  
Table 13-6. Timer/Counter1 Clock Prescale Select in the Asynchronous Mode  
PWM Frequency  
20kHz  
Clock Selection  
PCK/16  
PCK/16  
PCK/8  
PCK/8  
PCK/8  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK  
CS13..CS10  
0101  
0101  
0100  
0100  
0100  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
OCR1C  
199  
132  
199  
159  
132  
228  
199  
177  
159  
144  
132  
245  
228  
212  
199  
187  
177  
167  
159  
255  
212  
182  
159  
141  
127  
RESOLUTION  
7.6  
30kHz  
7.1  
40kHz  
7.6  
50kHz  
7.3  
60kHz  
7.1  
70kHz  
7.8  
80kHz  
7.6  
90kHz  
7.5  
100kHz  
110kHz  
120kHz  
130kHz  
140kHz  
150kHz  
160kHz  
170kHz  
180kHz  
190kHz  
200kHz  
250kHz  
300kHz  
350kHz  
400kHz  
450kHz  
500kHz  
7.3  
7.2  
7.1  
7.9  
7.8  
7.7  
7.6  
7.6  
7.5  
7.4  
7.3  
8.0  
PCK  
7.7  
PCK  
7.5  
PCK  
7.3  
PCK  
7.1  
PCK  
7.0  
84  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
14. Dead Time Generator  
The dead time generator is provided for the Timer/Counter1 PWM output pairs to allow driving external power control  
switches safely. The dead time generator is a separate block that can be connected to Timer/Counter1 and it is used to  
insert dead times (non-overlapping times) for the Timer/Counter1 complementary output pairs (OC1A-OC1A and  
OC1B-OC1B). The sharing of tasks is as follows: the Timer/Counter generates the PWM output and the dead time generator  
generates the non-overlapping PWM output pair from the Timer/Counter PWM signal. Two dead time generators are  
provided, one for each PWM output. The non-overlap time is adjustable and the PWM output and it’s complementary output  
are adjusted separately, and independently for both PWM outputs.  
Figure 14-1. Timer/Counter1 and Dead Time Generators  
PCKE  
Timer/Counter1  
T15M  
CK  
PWM Generator  
PWM1A  
PWM1B  
PCK  
DT1AH  
DT1AL  
DT1BH  
DT1BL  
Dead Time Generator  
Dead Time Generator  
OC1A  
OC1A  
OC1B  
OC1B  
The dead time generation is based on the 4-bit down counters that count the dead time, as shown in Figure 14-1 There is a  
dedicated prescaler in front of the dead time generator that can divide the Timer/Counter1 clock (PCK or CK) by 1, 2, 4 or 8.  
This provides for large range of dead times that can be generated. The prescaler is controlled by two control bits  
DTPS11..10 from the I/O register at address 0x23. The block has also a rising and falling edge detector that is used to start  
the dead time counting period. Depending on the edge, one of the transitions on the rising edges, OC1x or OC1x is delayed  
until the counter has counted to zero. The comparator is used to compare the counter with zero and stop the dead time  
insertion when zero has been reached. The counter is loaded with a 4-bit DT1xH or DT1xL value from DT1x I/O register,  
depending on the edge of the PWM generator output when the dead time insertion is started.  
Figure 14-2. Dead Time Generator  
T/C1 Clock DTPS11..10  
Comparator  
OC1x  
Dead Time  
Prescaler  
Clock Control  
4-bit Counter  
OC1x  
DT1x  
I/O Register  
PWM1x  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
85  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
The length of the counting period is user adjustable by selecting the dead time prescaler setting in 0x23 register, and  
selecting then the dead time value in I/O register DT1x. The DT1x register consists of two 4-bit fields, DT1xH and DT1xL that  
control the dead time periods of the PWM output and its’ complementary output separately. Thus the rising edge of OC1x  
and OC1x can have different dead time periods. The dead time is adjusted as the number of prescaled dead time generator  
clock cycles.  
Figure 14-3. The Complementary Output Pair  
PWM1x  
OC1x  
OC1x  
x= A or B  
t
t
n
o
n
-
o
v
e
r
l
a
p
/
r
i
s
i
n
g
e
d
g
e
n
o
n
-
o
v
e
r
l
a
p
/
f
a
l
l
i
n
g
e
d
g
e
14.1 Timer/Counter1 Dead Time Prescaler register 1 - DTPS1  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$23 ($43)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
DTPS11 DTPS10  
DTPS1  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The dead time prescaler register, DTPS1 is a 2-bit read/write register.  
Bits 1 - 0 - DTPS1: Timer/Counter1 dead time prescaler register 1  
The dedicated dead time prescaler in front of the dead time generator can divide the Timer/Counter1 clock (PCK or CK) by  
1, 2, 4 or 8 providing a large range of dead times that can be generated. The dead time prescaler is controlled by two bits  
DTPS11..10 from the dead time prescaler register. These bits define the division factor of the dead time prescaler. The  
division factors are given in Table 14-1.  
Table 14-1. Division Factors of the Dead Time Prescaler  
DTPS11  
DTPS10  
Prescaler divides the T/C1 clock by  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1x (no division)  
2x  
4x  
8x  
86  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
14.2 Timer/Counter1 Dead Time A - DT1A  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$25 ($45)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
DT1AH3 DT1AH2 DT1AH1 DT1AH0 DT1AL3 DT1AL2 DT1AL1 DT1AL0  
DT1A  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The dead time value register A is an 8-bit read/write register.  
The dead time delay of is adjusted by the dead time value register, DT1A. The register consists of two fields, DT1AH3..0 and  
DT1AL3..0, one for each complementary output. Therefore a different dead time delay can be adjusted for the rising edge of  
OC1A and the rising edge of OC1A.  
• Bits 7..4- DT1AH3..DT1AH0: Dead Time Value for OC1A Output  
The dead time value for the OC1A output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled Timer/Counter clocks.  
The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period multiplied by 15.  
• Bits 3..0- DT1AL3..DT1AL0: Dead Time Value for OC1A Output  
The dead time value for the OC1A output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled Timer/Counter clocks.  
The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period multiplied by 15.  
14.3 Timer/Counter1 Dead Time B - DT1B  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$25 ($45)  
Read/Write  
Initial value  
DT1BH3 DT1BH2 DT1BH1 DT1BH0 DT1BL3 DT1BL2 DT1BL1 DT1BL0  
DT1B  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The dead time value register bit an 8-bit read/write register.  
The dead time delay of is adjusted by the dead time value register, DT1B. The register consists of two fields, DT1BH3..0 and  
DT1BL3..0, one for each complementary output. Therefore a different dead time delay can be adjusted for the rising edge of  
OC1A and the rising edge of OC1A.  
• Bits 7..4- DT1BH3..DT1BH0: Dead Time Value for OC1B Output  
The dead time value for the OC1B output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled Timer/Counter clocks.  
The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period multiplied by 15.  
• Bits 3..0- DT1BL3..DT1BL0: Dead Time Value for OC1B Output  
The dead time value for the OC1B output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled Timer/Counter clocks.  
The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period multiplied by 15.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
87  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
15. Universal Serial Interface – USI  
The universal serial interface, or USI, provides the basic hardware resources needed for serial communication. Combined  
with a minimum of control software, the USI allows significantly higher transfer rates and uses less code space than  
solutions based on software only. Interrupts are included to minimize the processor load. The main features of the USI are:  
Two-wire synchronous data transfer (master or slave, fSCLmax = fCK/16)  
Three-wire synchronous data transfer (master or slave fSCKmax = fCK/4)  
Data received interrupt  
Wakeup from idle mode  
In two-wire mode: Wake-up from all sleep modes, including power-down mode  
Two-wire start condition detector with interrupt capability  
15.1 Overview  
A simplified block diagram of the USI is shown on Figure 15-1 For the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to  
Figure 1 on page 2. CPU accessible I/O registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O  
register and bit locations are listed in the Section 15.4 “USI Register Descriptions” on page 94.  
Figure 15-1. Universal Serial Interface, Block Diagram  
DO  
(Output only)  
D
Q
LE  
DI/SDA  
(Input/ Open Drain))  
3
2
USIDR  
USIDB  
1
0
TIM0 COMP  
3
2
0
1
USCK/SCL (Input/ Open Drain))  
4-bit Counter  
Clock  
Hold  
1
0
Two-wire Clock  
Control Unit  
[1]  
USISR  
2
USICR  
The 8-bit shift register is directly accessible via the data bus and contains the incoming and outgoing data. The register has  
no buffering so the data must be read as quickly as possible to ensure that no data is lost. The most significant bit is  
connected to one of two output pins depending of the wire mode configuration. A transparent latch is inserted between the  
serial register output and output pin, which delays the change of data output to the opposite clock edge of the data input  
sampling. The serial input is always sampled from the data input (DI) pin independent of the configuration.  
The 4-bit counter can be both read and written via the data bus, and can generate an overflow interrupt. Both the serial  
register and the counter are clocked simultaneously by the same clock source.  
This allows the counter to count the number of bits received or transmitted and generate an interrupt when the transfer is  
complete. Note that when an external clock source is selected the counter counts both clock edges. In this case the counter  
counts the number of edges, and not the number of bits. The clock can be selected from three different sources: The USCK  
pin, Timer/Counter0 compare match or from software.  
The two-wire clock control unit can generate an interrupt when a start condition is detected on the two-wire bus. It can also  
generate wait states by holding the clock pin low after a start condition is detected, or after the counter overflows.  
88  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
15.2 Functional Descriptions  
15.2.1 Three-wire Mode  
The USI three-wire mode is compliant to the serial peripheral interface (SPI) mode 0 and 1, but does not have the slave  
select (SS) pin functionality. However, this feature can be implemented in software if necessary. Pin names used by this  
mode are: DI, DO, and USCK.  
Figure 15-2. Three-wire Mode Operation, Simplified Diagram  
DO  
DI  
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0  
USCK  
SLAVE  
DO  
DI  
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0  
USCK  
PORTxn  
MASTER  
Figure 15-2 shows two USI units operating in three-wire mode, one as master and one as slave. The two shift registers are  
interconnected in such way that after eight USCK clocks, the data in each register are interchanged. The same clock also  
increments the USI’s 4-bit counter. The counter overflow (interrupt) flag, or USIOIF, can therefore be used to determine  
when a transfer is completed. The clock is generated by the master device software by toggling the USCK pin via the PORT  
register or by writing a one to the USITC bit in USICR.  
Figure 15-3. Three-wire Mode, Timing Diagram  
CYCLE (Reference)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
USCK  
USCK  
DO  
DI  
MSB  
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB  
LSB  
MSB  
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
B
C
D
E
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
89  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
The three-wire mode timing is shown in Figure 15-3 on page 89 At the top of the figure is a USCK cycle reference. One bit is  
shifted into the USI shift register (USIDR) for each of these cycles. The USCK timing is shown for both external clock modes.  
In external clock mode 0 (USICS0 = 0), DI is sampled at positive edges, and DO is changed (data register is shifted by one)  
at negative edges. External clock mode 1 (USICS0 = 1) uses the opposite edges versus mode 0, i.e., samples data at  
negative and changes the output at positive edges. The USI clock modes corresponds to the SPI data mode 0 and 1.  
Referring to the timing diagram (Figure 15-3 on page 89), a bus transfer involves the following steps:  
1. The slave device and master device sets up its data output and, depending on the protocol used, enables its  
output driver (mark A and B). The output is set up by writing the data to be transmitted to the serial data register.  
Enabling of the output is done by setting the corresponding bit in the port data direction register. Note that point A  
and B does not have any specific order, but both must be at least one half USCK cycle before point C where the  
data is sampled. This must be done to ensure that the data setup requirement is satisfied. The 4-bit counter is  
reset to zero.  
2. The master generates a clock pulse by software toggling the USCK line twice (C and D). The bit value on the  
slave and master’s data input (DI) pin is sampled by the USI on the first edge (C), and the data output is changed  
on the opposite edge (D). The 4-bit counter will count both edges.  
3. Step 2. is repeated eight times for a complete register (byte) transfer.  
4. After eight clock pulses (i.e., 16 clock edges) the counter will overflow and indicate that the transfer is completed.  
The data bytes transferred must now be processed before a new transfer can be initiated. The overflow interrupt  
will wake up the processor if it is set to Idle mode. Depending of the protocol used the slave device can now set its  
output to high impedance.  
15.2.2 SPI Master Operation Example  
The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI master:  
SPITransfer:  
sts  
ldi  
sts  
ldi  
USIDR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIOIF)  
USISR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIWM0)|(1<<USICS1)|(1<<USICLK)|(1<<USITC)  
SPITransfer_loop:  
sts  
lds  
USICR,r16  
r16, USISR  
sbrs  
rjmp  
lds  
r16, USIOIF  
SPITransfer_loop  
r16,USIDR  
ret  
The code is size optimized using only eight instructions (+ ret). The code example assumes that the DO and USCK pins are  
enabled as output in the DDRE register. The value stored in register r16 prior to the function is called is transferred to the  
slave device, and when the transfer is completed the data received from the slave is stored back into the r16 register.  
The second and third instructions clears the USI counter overflow flag and the USI counter value. The fourth and fifth  
instruction set three-wire mode, positive edge shift register clock, count at USITC strobe, and toggle USCK. The loop is  
repeated 16 times.  
90  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI master with maximum speed (fsck = fck/4):  
SPITransfer_Fast:  
sts  
ldi  
ldi  
USIDR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIWM0)|(0<<USICS0)|(1<<USITC)  
r17,(1<<USIWM0)|(0<<USICS0)|(1<<USITC)|(1<<USICLK)  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
sts  
USICR,r16; MSB  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16; LSB  
USICR,r17  
lds  
r16,USIDR  
ret  
15.2.3 SPI Slave Operation Example  
The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI slave:  
init:  
ldi  
sts  
r16,(1<<USIWM0)|(1<<USICS1)  
USICR,r16  
...  
SlaveSPITransfer:  
sts  
ldi  
sts  
USIDR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIOIF)  
USISR,r16  
SlaveSPITransfer_loop:  
lds  
r16, USISR  
r16, USIOIF  
sbrs  
rjmp  
lds  
SlaveSPITransfer_loop  
r16,USIDR  
ret  
The code is size optimized using only eight instructions (+ ret). The code example assumes that the DO is configured as  
output and USCK pin is configured as input in the DDR register. The value stored in register r16 prior to the function is called  
is transferred to the master device, and when the transfer is completed the data received from the master is stored back into  
the r16 register.  
Note that the first two instructions is for initialization only and needs only to be executed once.These instructions sets  
three-wire mode and positive edge shift register clock. The loop is repeated until the USI counter overflow flag is set.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
91  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
15.2.4 Two-wire Mode  
The USI two-wire mode is compliant to the inter IC (TWI) bus protocol, but without slew rate limiting on outputs and input  
noise filtering. Pin names used by this mode are SCL and SDA.  
Figure 15-4. Two-wire Mode Operation, Simplified Diagram  
VCC  
SDA  
SCL  
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0  
Hold  
SCL  
Two-wire  
Clock  
Control Unit  
SLAVE  
SDA  
SCL  
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0  
PORTxn  
MASTER  
Figure 15-4 shows two USI units operating in two-wire mode, one as master and one as slave. It is only the physical layer  
that is shown since the system operation is highly dependent of the communication scheme used. The main differences  
between the master and slave operation at this level, is the serial clock generation which is always done by the master, and  
only the slave uses the clock control unit. Clock generation must be implemented in software, but the shift operation is done  
automatically by both devices. Note that only clocking on negative edge for shifting data is of practical use in this mode. The  
slave can insert wait states at start or end of transfer by forcing the SCL clock low. This means that the master must always  
check if the SCL line was actually released after it has generated a positive edge.  
Since the clock also increments the counter, a counter overflow can be used to indicate that the transfer is completed. The  
clock is generated by the master by toggling the USCK pin via the PORT register.  
The data direction is not given by the physical layer. A protocol, like the one used by the TWI-bus, must be implemented to  
control the data flow.  
Figure 15-5. Two-wire Mode, Typical Timing Diagram  
SDA  
SCL  
1 to 7  
8
9
1 to 8  
DATA  
9
1 to 8  
DATA  
9
S
A
P
F
ADDRESS  
R/W  
ACK  
ACK  
ACK  
B
C
D
E
92  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Referring to the timing diagram (Figure 15-5 on page 92), a bus transfer involves the following steps:  
1. The a start condition is generated by the master by forcing the SDA low line while the SCL line is high (A). SDA  
can be forced low either by writing a zero to bit 7 of the shift register, or by setting the corresponding bit in the  
PORT register to zero. Note that the data direction register bit must be set to one for the output to be enabled. The  
slave device’s start detector logic (Figure 15-5) detects the start condition and sets the USISIF flag. The flag can  
generate an interrupt if necessary.  
2. In addition, the start detector will hold the SCL line low after the master has forced an negative edge on this line  
(B). This allows the Slave to wake up from sleep or complete its other tasks before setting up the shift register to  
receive the address. This is done by clearing the start condition flag and reset the counter.  
3. The master set the first bit to be transferred and releases the SCL line (C). The slave samples the data and shift it  
into the serial register at the positive edge of the SCL clock.  
4. After eight bits are transferred containing slave address and data direction (read or write), the slave counter  
overflows and the SCL line is forced low (D). If the slave is not the one the master has addressed, it releases the  
SCL line and waits for a new start condition.  
5. If the slave is addressed it holds the SDA line low during the acknowledgment cycle before holding the SCL line  
low again (i.e., the counter register must be set to 14 before releasing SCL at (D)). Depending of the R/W bit the  
master or slave enables its output. If the bit is set, a master read operation is in progress (i.e., the slave drives the  
SDA line) The slave can hold the SCL line low after the acknowledge (E).  
6. Multiple bytes can now be transmitted, all in same direction, until a stop condition is given by the master (F). Or a  
new start condition is given.  
If the slave is not able to receive more data it does not acknowledge the data byte it has last received. When the master does  
a read operation it must terminate the operation by force the acknowledge bit low after the last byte transmitted.  
Figure 15-6. Start Condition Detector, Logic Diagram  
USISIF  
D
Q
D
Q
CLOCK  
HOLD  
SDA  
CLR  
CLR  
SCL  
Write (USISIF)  
15.2.5 Start Condition Detector  
The start condition detector is shown in Figure 15-6 The SDA line is delayed (in the range of 50 to 300 ns) to ensure valid  
sampling of the SCL line. The start condition detector is only enabled in two-wire mode.  
The start condition detector is working asynchronously and can therefore wake up the processor from the power-down sleep  
mode. However, the protocol used might have restrictions on the SCL hold time. Therefore, when using this feature in this  
case the oscillator start-up time set by the CKSEL fuses (see Section 5.1 “Clock Systems and their Distribution” on page 19)  
must also be taken into the consideration. Refer to the USISIF bit description on page 95 for further details.  
15.3 Alternative USI Usage  
When the USI unit is not used for serial communication, it can be set up to do alternative tasks due to its flexible design.  
15.3.1 Half-duplex Asynchronous Data Transfer  
By utilizing the shift register in three-wire mode, it is possible to implement a more compact and higher performance UART  
than by software only.  
15.3.2 4-bit Counter  
The 4-bit counter can be used as a stand-alone counter with overflow interrupt. Note that if the counter is clocked externally,  
both clock edges will generate an increment.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
93  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
15.3.3 12-bit Timer/Counter  
Combining the USI 4-bit counter and Timer/Counter0 allows them to be used as a 12-bit counter.  
15.3.4 Edge Triggered External Interrupt  
By setting the counter to maximum value (F) it can function as an additional external interrupt. The overflow flag and interrupt  
Enable bit are then used for the external interrupt. This feature is selected by the USICS1 bit.  
15.3.5 Software Interrupt  
The counter overflow interrupt can be used as a software interrupt triggered by a clock strobe.  
15.4 USI Register Descriptions  
15.4.1 USI Data Register – USIDR  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
USIDR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
When accessing the USI data register (USIDR) the serial register can be accessed directly. If a serial clock occurs at the  
same cycle the register is written, the register will contain the value written and no shift is performed. A (left) shift operation is  
performed depending of the USICS1..0 bits setting. The shift operation can be controlled by an external clock edge, by a  
Timer/Counter0 compare match, or directly by software using the USICLK strobe bit. Note that even when no wire mode is  
selected (USIWM1..0 = 0) both the external data input (DI/SDA) and the external clock input (USCK/SCL) can still be used  
by the shift register.  
The output pin in use, DO or SDA depending on the wire mode, is connected via the output latch to the most significant bit  
(bit 7) of the data register. The output latch is open (transparent) during the first half of a serial clock cycle when an external  
clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1), and constantly open when an internal clock source is used (USICS1 = 0). The output  
will be changed immediately when a new MSB written as long as the latch is open. The latch ensures that data input is  
sampled and data output is changed on opposite clock edges.  
Note that the corresponding data direction register to the pin must be set to one for enabling data output from the shift  
register.  
15.4.2 USI Buffer Register – USIBR  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LSB  
R
USIBR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
The content of the serial register is loaded to the USI buffer register when the trasfer is completed, and instead of accessing  
the USI data register (the serial register) the USI data buffer can be accessed when the CPU reads the received data. This  
gives the CPU time to handle other program tasks too as the controlling of the USI is not so timing critical. The USI flags as  
set same as when reading the USIDR register.  
94  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
15.4.3 USI Status Register – USISR  
Bit  
7
USISIF  
R/W  
0
6
USIOIF  
R/W  
0
5
USIPF  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
0
USIDC  
USICNT3 USICNT2 USICNT1 USICNT0 USISR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The status register contains interrupt flags, line status flags and the counter value.  
• Bit 7 – USISIF: Start Condition Interrupt Flag  
When two-wire mode is selected, the USISIF flag is set (to one) when a start condition is detected. When output disable  
mode or three-wire mode is selected and (USICSx = 0b11 and USICLK = 0) or (USICS = 0b10 and USICLK = 0), any edge  
on the SCK pin sets the flag.  
An interrupt will be generated when the flag is set while the USISIE bit in USICR and the global interrupt enable flag are set.  
The flag will only be cleared by writing a logical one to the USISIF bit. Clearing this bit will release the start detection hold of  
USCL in two-wire mode.  
A start condition interrupt will wakeup the processor from all sleep modes.  
• Bit 6 – USIOIF: Counter Overflow Interrupt Flag  
This flag is set (one) when the 4-bit counter overflows (i.e., at the transition from 15 to 0). An interrupt will be generated when  
the flag is set while the USIOIE bit in USICR and the global interrupt enable flag are set. The flag will only be cleared if a one  
is written to the USIOIF bit. Clearing this bit will release the counter overflow hold of SCL in two-wire mode.  
A counter overflow interrupt will wakeup the processor from Idle sleep mode.  
• Bit 5 – USIPF: Stop Condition Flag  
When two-wire mode is selected, the USIPF Flag is set (one) when a stop condition is detected. The flag is cleared by  
writing a one to this bit. Note that this is not an interrupt flag. This signal is useful when implementing two-wire bus master  
arbitration.  
• Bit 4 – USIDC: Data Output Collision  
This bit is logical one when bit 7 in the shift register differs from the physical pin value. The flag is only valid when two-wire  
mode is used. This signal is useful when implementing two-wire bus master arbitration.  
• Bits 3..0 – USICNT3..0: Counter Value  
These bits reflect the current 4-bit counter value. The 4-bit counter value can directly be read or written by the CPU.  
The 4-bit counter increments by one for each clock generated either by the external clock edge detector, by a  
Timer/Counter0 compare match, or by software using USICLK or USITC strobe bits. The clock source depends of the setting  
of the USICS1..0 bits. For external clock operation a special feature is added that allows the clock to be generated by writing  
to the USITC strobe bit. This feature is enabled by write a one to the USICLK bit while setting an external clock source  
(USICS1 = 1).  
Note that even when no wire mode is selected (USIWM1..0 = 0) the external clock input (USCK/SCL) are can still be used by  
the counter.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
95  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
15.4.4 USI Control Register – USICR  
Bit  
7
USISIE  
R/W  
0
6
USIOIE  
R/W  
0
5
USIWM1  
R/W  
4
USIWM0  
R/W  
3
USICS1  
R/W  
0
2
1
0
USITC  
W
USICS0 USICLK  
USICR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
W
0
0
0
0
The control register includes interrupt enable control, wire mode setting, clock select setting, and clock strobe.  
• Bit 7 – USISIE: Start Condition Interrupt Enable  
Setting this bit to one enables the start condition detector interrupt. If there is a pending interrupt when the USISIE and the  
global interrupt enable flag is set to one, this will immediately be executed. Refer to the USISIF bit description on page 95 for  
further details.  
• Bit 6 – USIOIE: Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable  
Setting this bit to one enables the counter overflow interrupt. If there is a pending interrupt when the USIOIE and the global  
interrupt enable flag is set to one, this will immediately be executed. Refer to the USIOIF bit description on page 95 for  
further details.  
• Bit 5..4 – USIWM1..0: Wire Mode  
These bits set the type of wire mode to be used. Basically only the function of the outputs are affected by these bits. Data  
and clock inputs are not affected by the mode selected and will always have the same function. The counter and shift  
register can therefore be clocked externally, and data input sampled, even when outputs are disabled. The relations  
between USIWM1..0 and the USI operation is summarized in Table 15-1 on page 96.  
Table 15-1. Relations between USIWM1..0 and the USI Operation  
USIWM1  
USIWM0  
Description  
0
0
Outputs, clock hold, and start detector disabled. Port pins operates as normal.  
Three-wire mode. Uses DO, DI, and USCK pins.  
The Data Output (DO) pin overrides the corresponding bit in the PORT Register in this mode.  
However, the corresponding DDR bit still controls the data direction. When the port pin is set  
as input the pins pull-up is controlled by the PORT bit.  
The Data Input (DI) and Serial Clock (USCK) pins do not affect the normal port operation.  
When operating as master, clock pulses are software generated by toggling the PORT  
Register, while the data direction is set to output. The USITC bit in the USICR Register can  
be used for this purpose.  
0
1
Two-wire mode. Uses SDA (DI) and SCL (USCK) pins(1).  
The Serial Data (SDA) and the Serial Clock (SCL) pins are bi-directional and uses open-  
collector output drives. The output drivers are enabled by setting the corresponding bit for  
SDA and SCL in the DDR Register.  
When the output driver is enabled for the SDA pin, the output driver will force the line SDA  
low if the output of the Shift Register or the corresponding bit in the PORT Register is zero.  
Otherwise the SDA line will not be driven (i.e., it is released). When the SCL pin output driver  
is enabled the SCL line will be forced low if the corresponding bit in the PORT Register is  
zero, or by the start detector. Otherwise the SCL line will not be driven.  
The SCL line is held low when a start detector detects a start condition and the output is  
enabled. Clearing the Start Condition Flag (USISIF) releases the line. The SDA and SCL pin  
inputs is not affected by enabling this mode. Pull-ups on the SDA and SCL port pin are  
disabled in Two-wire mode.  
1
0
Two-wire mode. Uses SDA and SCL pins.  
Same operation as for the Two-wire mode described above, except that the SCL line is also  
held low when a counter overflow occurs, and is held low until the Counter Overflow Flag  
(USIOIF) is cleared.  
1
1
Note:  
1. The DI and USCK pins are renamed to serial data (SDA) and serial clock (SCL) respectively to avoid  
confusion between the modes of operation.  
96  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
• Bit 3..2 – USICS1..0: Clock Source Select  
These bits set the clock source for the shift register and counter. The data output latch ensures that the output is changed at  
the opposite edge of the sampling of the data input (DI/SDA) when using external clock source (USCK/SCL). When software  
strobe or Timer/Counter0 compare match clock option is selected, the output latch is transparent and therefore the output is  
changed immediately. Clearing the USICS1..0 bits enables software strobe option. When using this option, writing a one to  
the USICLK bit clocks both the shift register and the counter. For external clock source (USICS1 = 1), the USICLK bit is no  
longer used as a strobe, but selects between external clocking and software clocking by the USITC strobe bit.  
Table 15-2 shows the relationship between the USICS1..0 and USICLK setting and clock source used for the shift register  
and the 4-bit counter.  
Table 15-2. Relations between the USICS1..0 and USICLK Setting  
USICS1  
USICS0  
USICLK  
Shift Register Clock Source  
No Clock  
4-bit Counter Clock Source  
No Clock  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
X
0
0
1
1
Software clock strobe (USICLK)  
Timer/Counter0 compare match  
External, positive edge  
External, negative edge  
External, positive edge  
External, negative edge  
Software clock strobe (USICLK)  
Timer/Counter0 compare match  
External, both edges  
External, both edges  
Software clock strobe (USITC)  
Software clock strobe (USITC)  
• Bit 1 – USICLK: Clock Strobe  
Writing a one to this bit location strobes the shift register to shift one step and the counter to increment by one, provided that  
the USICS1..0 bits are set to zero and by doing so the software clock strobe option is selected. The output will change  
immediately when the clock strobe is executed, i.e., in the same instruction cycle. The value shifted into the shift register is  
sampled the previous instruction cycle. The bit will be read as zero.  
When an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1), the USICLK function is changed from a clock strobe to a clock  
select register. Setting the USICLK bit in this case will select the USITC strobe bit as clock source for the 4-bit counter (see  
Table 15-2 on page 97).  
• Bit 0 – USITC: Toggle Clock Port Pin  
Writing a one to this bit location toggles the USCK/SCL value either from 0 to 1, or from 1 to 0. The toggling is independent  
of the setting in the data direction register, but if the PORT value is to be shown on the pin the DDRE4 must be set as output  
(to one). This feature allows easy clock generation when implementing master devices. The bit will be read as zero.  
When an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1) and the USICLK bit is set to one, writing to the USITC strobe bit will  
directly clock the 4-bit counter. This allows an early detection of when the transfer is done when operating as a master  
device.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
97  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
16. Analog Comparator  
The analog comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin AIN1. When the voltage on the  
positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin AIN1, the analog comparator output, ACO, is set. The  
comparator can trigger a separate interrupt, exclusive to the analog comparator. The user can select interrupt triggering on  
comparator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is shown in Figure 16-1.  
Figure 16-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram(2)  
VCC  
Bandgap  
Reference  
ACBG  
ACD  
ACIE  
AIN0  
AIN1  
Analog  
Comparator  
IRQ  
+
Interrupt  
Select  
-
ACI  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
ACME  
ADEN  
ACO  
ADC Multiplexer  
Output(1)  
Notes: 1. See Table 16-2 on page 100.  
2. Refer to Figure 1 on page 2 and Table 9-5 on page 52 for analog comparator pin placement.  
16.1 ADC Control and Status Register B – ADCSRB  
Bit  
7
BIN  
R
6
ACME  
R/W  
0
5
IPR  
R
4
3
2
ADTS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADTS1  
R/W  
0
0
ADTS0  
R/W  
0
ADCSRB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
0
0
• Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable  
When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the ADC multiplexer selects the  
negative input to the analog comparator. When this bit is written logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the  
analog comparator. For a detailed description of this bit, see Section 16.3 “Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page  
100.  
16.2 Analog Comparator Control and Status Register – ACSR  
Bit  
7
6
ACBG  
R/W  
0
5
ACO  
R
4
ACI  
R/W  
0
3
ACIE  
R/W  
0
2
1
ACIS1  
R/W  
0
0
ACIS0  
R/W  
0
ACD  
R/W  
0
ACSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
N/A  
• Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable  
When this bit is written logic one, the power to the analog comparator is switched off. This bit can be set at any time to turn  
off the analog comparator.  
This will reduce power consumption in Active and idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the analog comparator interrupt  
must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is changed.  
98  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
• Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select  
When this bit is set an internal 1.1V/2.56V reference voltage replaces the positive input to the analog comparator. The  
selection of the internal voltage reference is done by writing the REFS2..0 bits in ADMUX register. When this bit is cleared,  
AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the analog comparator.  
• Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output  
The output of the analog comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The synchronization introduces a  
delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles.  
• Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The  
analog comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware  
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag.  
• Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable  
When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the status register is set, the analog comparator interrupt is activated.  
When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled.  
• Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select  
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the analog comparator interrupt. The different settings are shown  
in Table 16-1.  
Table 16-1. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
Interrupt Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Comparator interrupt on output toggle.  
Reserved  
Comparator interrupt on falling output edge.  
Comparator interrupt on rising output edge.  
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the analog comparator interrupt must be disabled by clearing its interrupt enable bit in  
the ACSR register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
99  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
16.3 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input  
It is possible to select any of the ADC3..0 pins to replace the negative input to the analog comparator. The ADC multiplexer  
is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must be switched off to utilize this feature. If the analog comparator  
multiplexer enable bit (ACME in ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), MUX1..0 in  
ADMUX select the input pin to replace the negative input to the analog comparator, as shown in Table 16-2. If ACME is  
cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the analog comparator.  
Table 16-2. Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input  
ACME  
ADEN  
MUX1..0  
Analog Comparator Negative Input  
0
1
1
1
1
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
xx  
xx  
00  
01  
10  
11  
AIN1  
AIN1  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
16.3.1 Digital Input Disable Register 0 – DIDR0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AIN0D  
R/W  
0
ADC0D ADC2D ADC3D ADC1D AIN1D  
DIDR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bits 1, 0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN1, AIN0 Digital Input Disable  
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin is disabled. The corresponding PIN register bit will  
always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin  
is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.  
100  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
17. Analog to Digital Converter  
17.1 Features  
10-bit resolution  
0.5 LSB integral non-linearity  
±2 LSB absolute accuracy  
65 - 260µs conversion time  
Up to 15kSPS at maximum resolution  
Four multiplexed single ended input channels  
Two differential input channels with selectable gain  
Temperature sensor input channel  
Optional left adjustment for ADC result readout  
0 - VCC ADC input voltage range  
Selectable 1.1V / 2.56V ADC voltage reference  
Free running or single conversion mode  
ADC start conversion by auto triggering on interrupt sources  
Interrupt on ADC conversion complete  
Sleep mode noise canceler  
Unipolar/bibilar input mode  
Input polarity reversal mode  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. The ADC is connected to a 4-channel analog  
multiplexer which allows one differential voltage input and four single-ended voltage inputs constructed from the pins of port  
B. The differential input (PB3, PB4 or PB2, PB5) is equipped with a programmable gain stage, providing amplification step of  
26dB (20x) on the differential input voltage before the A/D conversion. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND).  
The ADC contains a sample and hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is held at a constant level  
during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 17-1 on page 102.  
Internal voltage references of nominally 1.1V or 2.56V are provided on-chip and these voltage references can optionally be  
externally decoupled at the AREF (PB0) pin by a capacitor, for better noise performance. Alternatively, VCC can be used as  
voltage reference for single ended channels. There is also an option to use an external voltage reference and turn-off the  
internal voltage reference. These options are selected using the REFS2..0 bits of the ADMUX control register.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
101  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 17-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic  
ADC Conversion  
Complete IRQ  
Interrupt  
Flags  
ADTS[2:0]  
8-bit Data Bus  
15  
0
ADC CTRL and Status B  
Register (ADCSRB)  
ADC Multiplexer  
Select (ADMUX)  
ADC CTRL and Status A  
Register (ADCSRA)  
ADC Data Register  
(ADCH/ADCL)  
BIN  
IPR  
Trigger  
Select  
START  
Prescaler  
MUX Decoder  
VCC  
AREF  
Conversion Logic  
Internal  
1.1V/2.56V  
Reference  
Sample and Hold  
Temperature  
Sensor  
Comparator  
10-bit DAC  
-
+
ADC4  
Single Ended/ Differential Selection  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADC1  
ADC0  
POS.  
Input  
MUX  
ADC  
MULTIPLEXER  
OUTPUT  
+
-
Gain  
Amplifier  
NEG.  
Input  
MUX  
17.2 Operation  
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approximation. The minimum value  
represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on VCC, the voltage on the AREF pin or an internal  
1.1V/2.56V voltage reference.  
The voltage reference for the ADC may be selected by writing to the REFS2..0 bits in ADMUX. The VCC supply, the AREF  
pin or an internal 1.1V/2.56V voltage reference may be selected as the ADC voltage reference. Optionally the internal  
1.1V/2.56V voltage reference may be decoupled by an external capacitor at the AREF pin to improve noise immunity.  
The analog input channel and differential gain are selected by writing to the MUX3..0 bits in ADMUX. Any of the four ADC  
input pins ADC3..0 can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC. ADC2 or ADC0 can be selected as positive input and  
ADC0, ADC1, ADC2 or ADC3 can be selected as negative input to the differential gain amplifier.  
102  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
If differential channels are selected, the differential gain stage amplifies the voltage difference between the selected input  
pair by the selected gain factor, 1x or 20x, according to the setting of the MUX3..0 bits in ADMUX. This amplified value then  
becomes the analog input to the ADC. If single ended channels are used, the gain amplifier is bypassed altogether.  
If ADC0 or ADC2 is selected as both the positive and negative input to the differential gain amplifier  
(ADC0-ADC0 or ADC2-ADC2), the remaining offset in the gain stage and conversion circuitry can be measured directly as  
the result of the conversion. This figure can be subtracted from subsequent conversions with the same gain setting to reduce  
offset error to below 1 LSW.  
The on-chip temperature sensor is selected by writing the code “1111” to the MUX3..0 bits in ADMUX register when the  
ADC4 channel is used as an ADC input.  
The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA. Voltage reference and input channel selections will  
not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to  
switch off the ADC before entering power saving sleep modes.  
The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC data registers, ADCH and ADCL. By default, the result is  
presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.  
If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must  
be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the data registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is  
read, ADC access to data registers is blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before  
ADCH is read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read, ADC access to the  
ADCH and ADCL registers is re-enabled.  
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. When ADC access to the data registers  
is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt will trigger even if the result is lost.  
17.3 Starting a Conversion  
A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC start conversion bit, ADSC. This bit stays high as long as  
the conversion is in progress and will be cleared by hardware when the conversion is completed. If a different data channel  
is selected while a conversion is in progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before performing the channel  
change.  
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto triggering is enabled by setting the ADC  
auto trigger enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC trigger select bits, ADTS in  
ADCSRB (see description of the ADTS bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected  
trigger signal, the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting conversions at fixed  
intervals. If the trigger signal still is set when the conversion completes, a new conversion will not be started. If another  
positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during conversion, the edge will be ignored. Note that an interrupt flag will be set  
even if the specific interrupt is disabled or the global interrupt enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus be  
triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the interrupt flag must be cleared in order to trigger a new conversion at the  
next interrupt event.  
Figure 17-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic  
ADTS[2:0]  
Prescaler  
START  
CLKADC  
ADIF  
ADATE  
SOURCE 1  
.
.
.
.
Conversion  
Logic  
Edge  
Detector  
SOURCE n  
ADSC  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
103  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Using the ADC interrupt flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon as the ongoing conversion  
has finished. The ADC then operates in free running mode, constantly sampling and updating the ADC data register. The  
first conversion must be started by writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform  
successive conversions independently of whether the ADC interrupt flag, ADIF is cleared or not.  
If auto triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to one. ADSC can also be used  
to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be read as one during a conversion, independently of how the  
conversion was started.  
17.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing  
Figure 17-3. ADC Prescaler  
ADEN  
Reset  
START  
7-bit ADC Prescaler  
CK  
ADPS0  
ADPS1  
ADPS2  
ADC Clock Source  
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50kHz and 200kHz to get  
maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than  
200kHz to get a higher sample rate. It is not recommended to use a higher input clock frequency than 1MHz.  
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency from any CPU frequency above  
100kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA. The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is  
switched on by setting the ADEN bit in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is  
continuously reset when ADEN is low.  
When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion starts at the following rising  
edge of the ADC clock cycle.  
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set)  
takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry.  
The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conversion and 14.5 ADC clock  
cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion is complete, the result is written to the ADC data registers,  
and ADIF is set. In single conversion mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a  
new conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge.  
When auto triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs. This assures a fixed delay from the trigger  
event to the start of conversion. In this mode, the sample-and-hold takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on  
the trigger source signal. Three additional CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic.  
In free running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion completes, while ADSC remains  
high. For a summary of conversion times, see Table 17-1 on page 106.  
104  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 17-4. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion (Single Conversion Mode)  
Next  
Conversion  
First Conversion  
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADEN  
1
2
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
1
2
3
ADSC  
ADIF  
ADCH  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
ADCL  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Conversion  
Complete  
Sample and Hold  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Figure 17-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
ADIF  
ADCH  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
ADCL  
Sample and Hold  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Conversion  
Complete  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
105  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 17-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
Trigger  
Source  
ADATE  
ADIF  
ADCH  
ADCL  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
Prescaler  
Reset  
Sample and Hold  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Conversion  
Complete  
Prescaler  
Reset  
Figure 17-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
4
ADIF  
ADCH  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
ADCL  
Sample and Hold  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Conversion  
Complete  
Table 17-1. ADC Conversion Time  
Sample and Hold (Cycles from  
Start of Conversion)  
Condition  
Total Conversion Time (Cycles)  
First conversion  
13.5  
1.5  
2
25  
13  
Normal conversions  
Auto triggered conversions  
13.5  
106  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
17.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection  
The MUX3..0 and REFS2..0 bits in the ADMUX register are single buffered through a temporary register to which the CPU  
has random access. This ensures that the channels and voltage reference selection only takes place at a safe point during  
the conversion. The channel and voltage reference selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the  
conversion starts, the channel and voltage reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC.  
Continuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). Note  
that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write  
new channel or voltage reference selection values to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.  
If auto triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special care must be taken when  
updating the ADMUX register, in order to control which conversion will be affected by the new settings.  
If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the ADMUX register is changed in this  
period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in  
the following ways:  
a. When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.  
b. During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event.  
c. After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared.  
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC conversion.  
17.5.1 ADC Input Channels  
When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure that the correct channel is  
selected:  
In single conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The channel selection may be changed  
one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the conversion to complete  
before changing the channel selection.  
In free running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The channel selection may be changed  
one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete,  
and then change the channel selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next result will  
reflect the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new channel selection.  
17.5.2 ADC Voltage Reference  
The voltage reference for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single ended channels that exceed  
VREF will result in codes close to 0x3FF. VREF can be selected as either VCC, or internal 1.1V/2.56V voltage reference, or  
external AREF pin. The first ADC conversion result after switching voltage reference source may be inaccurate, and the user  
is advised to discard this result.  
17.6 ADC Noise Canceler  
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise induced from the CPU core  
and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC noise reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this  
feature, the following procedure should be used:  
a. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single conversion mode must be selected and the  
ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled.  
b. Enter ADC noise reduction mode (or idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once the CPU has been halted.  
c. If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will wake up the CPU and  
execute the ADC conversion complete interrupt routine. If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC  
conversion is complete, that interrupt will be executed, and an ADC conversion complete interrupt request will be  
generated when the ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active mode until a new sleep command  
is executed.  
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle mode and ADC noise  
reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before entering such sleep modes to avoid excessive power  
consumption.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
107  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
17.6.1 Analog Input Circuitry  
The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 17-8. An analog source applied to ADCn is  
subjected to the pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regardless of whether that channel is selected as input for the  
ADC. When the channel is selected, the source must drive the S/H capacitor through the series resistance (combined  
resistance in the input path).  
The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10 kΩ or less. If such a source is used,  
the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher impedance is used, the sampling time will depend on how long  
time the source needs to charge the S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedant  
sources with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H capacitor.  
Signal components higher than the nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present to avoid distortion from unpredictable  
signal convolution. The user is advised to remove high frequency components with a low-pass filter before applying the  
signals as inputs to the ADC.  
Figure 17-8. Analog Input Circuitry  
IIH  
ADCn  
1 to 100kΩ  
IIL  
CS/H = 14pF  
VCC/2  
17.6.2 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques  
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of analog measurements. If  
conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by applying the following techniques:  
a. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over the analog ground plane, and  
keep them well away from high-speed switching digital tracks.  
b. Use the ADC noise canceler function to reduce induced noise from the CPU.  
c. If any port pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not switch while a conversion is in progress.  
108  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
17.6.3 ADC Accuracy Definitions  
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and VREF in 2n steps (LSBs). The lowest code is read  
as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n–1.  
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:  
Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal transition (at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value:  
0 LSB.  
Figure 17-9. Offset Error  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
Offset  
Error  
VREF Input Voltage  
Gain error: After adjusting for offset, the gain error is found as the deviation of the last transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF)  
compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum). Ideal value: 0 LSB  
Figure 17-10. Gain Error  
Output Code  
Gain  
Error  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
VREF Input Voltage  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
109  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Integral non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum deviation of an actual  
transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0 LSB.  
Figure 17-11. Integral Non-linearity (INL)  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
VREF Input Voltage  
Differential non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the interval between two adjacent  
transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.  
Figure 17-12. Differential Non-linearity (DNL)  
Output Code  
0x3FF  
1 LSB  
DNL  
0x000  
0
VREF Input Voltage  
Quantization error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of codes, a range of input voltages  
(1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ±0.5 LSB.  
Absolute accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared to an ideal transition for  
any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal  
value: ±0.5 LSB.  
110  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
17.7 ADC Conversion Result  
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC result registers (ADCL,  
ADCH). The form of the conversion result depends on the type of the conversion as there are three types of conversions:  
single ended conversion, unipolar differential conversion and bipolar differential conversion.  
17.7.1 Single Ended Conversion  
For single ended conversion, the result is  
VIN × 1024  
---------------------------  
ADC =  
VREF  
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see Table 17-3 on page 112 and  
Table 17-4 on page 113). 0x000 represents analog ground, and 0x3FF represents the selected voltage reference minus one  
LSB. The result is presented in one-sided form, from 0x3FF to 0x000.  
17.7.2 Unipolar Differential Conversion  
If differential channels and an unipolar input mode are used, the result is  
(VPOS VNEG ) × 1024  
--------------------------------------------------------  
ADC =  
× GAIN  
VREF  
where VPOS is the voltage on the positive input pin, VNEG the voltage on the negative input pin, and VREF the selected voltage  
reference (see Table 17-3 on page 112 and Table 17-4 on page 113). The voltage on the positive pin must always be larger  
than the voltage on the negative pin or otherwise the voltage difference is saturated to zero. The result is presented in one-  
sided form, from 0x000 (0d) to 0x3FF (+1023d). The GAIN is either 1x or 20x.  
17.7.3 Bipolar Differential Conversion  
As default the ADC converter operates in the unipolar input mode, but the bipolar input mode can be selected by writing the  
BIN bit in the ADCSRB to one. In the bipolar input mode two-sided voltage differences are allowed and thus the voltage on  
the negative input pin can also be larger than the voltage on the positive input pin. If differential channels and a bipolar input  
mode are used, the result is  
(VPOS VNEG ) × 512  
-----------------------------------------------------  
ADC =  
× GAIN  
VREF  
where VPOS is the voltage on the positive input pin, VNEG the voltage on the negative input pin, and VREF the selected voltage  
reference. The result is presented in two’s complement form, from 0x200 (–512d) through 0x000 (+0d) to 0x1FF (+511d).  
The GAIN is either 1x or 20x.  
However, if the signal is not bipolar by nature (9 bits + sign as the 10th bit), this scheme loses one bit of the converter  
dynamic range. Then, if the user wants to perform the conversion with the maximum dynamic range, the user can perform a  
quick polarity check of the result and use the unipolar differential conversion with selectable differential input pairs (see the  
input polarity reversal mode ie. the IPR bit in the Section 17.7.8 “ADC Control and Status Register B – ADCSRB” on page  
115). When the polarity check is performed, it is sufficient to read the MSB of the result (ADC9 in ADCH). If the bit is one, the  
result is negative, and if this bit is zero, the result is positive.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
111  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
17.7.4 Temperature Measurement (Preliminary description)  
The temperature measurement is based on an on-chip temperature sensor that is coupled to a single ended ADC4 channel.  
Selecting the ADC4 channel by writing the MUX3..0 bits in ADMUX register to “1111” enables the temperature sensor. The  
internal 1.1V voltage reference must also be selected for the ADC voltage reference source in the temperature sensor  
measurement. When the temperature sensor is enabled, the ADC converter can be used in single conversion mode to  
measure the voltage over the temperature sensor.  
The measured voltage has a linear relationship to the temperature as described in Table 17-2. The voltage sensitivity is  
approximately 1mV/°C and the accuracy of the temperature measurement is ±10°C after bandgap calibration.  
Table 17-2. Temperature versus Sensor Output Voltage (Typical Case)  
Temperature/°C  
–45°C  
+25°C  
+105°C  
Voltage/mV  
242mV  
314mv  
403mV  
The values described in Table 17-2 are typical values. However, due to the process variation the temperature sensor output  
voltage varies from one chip to another. To be capable of achieving more accurate results the temperature measurement  
can be calibrated in the application software. The software calibration requires that a calibration value is measured and  
stored in a register or EEPROM for each chip, as a part of the production test. The software calibration can be done utilizing  
the formula:  
Temperature = k × VTEMP + TOS  
where VTEMP is the ADC reading of the temperature sensor signal, k is a fixed coefficient and TOS is the temperature sensor  
offset value determined and stored into EEPROM as a part of production test.  
17.7.5 ADC Multiplexer Selection Register – ADMUX  
Bit  
7
6
REFS0  
R/W  
0
5
ADLAR  
R/W  
0
4
3
MUX3  
R
2
MUX2  
R
1
MUX1  
R/W  
0
0
MUX0  
R/W  
0
REFS1  
REFS2  
ADMUX  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
0
0
• Bit 7..6,4 – REFS2..REFS0: Voltage Reference Selection Bits  
These bits select the voltage reference (VREF) for the ADC, as shown in Table 17-3. If these bits are changed during a  
conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSR is set). Whenever these bits  
are changed, the next conversion will take 25 ADC clock cycles. If active channels are used, using VCC or an external AREF  
higher than (VCC – 1V) as a voltage reference is not recommended, as this will affect the ADC accuracy.  
Table 17-3. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC  
REFS2  
REFS1  
REFS0  
Voltage Reference (VREF) Selection  
0
0
0
VCC used as voltage reference, disconnected from PB0 (AREF).  
External voltage reference at PB0 (AREF) pin, internal voltage reference turned  
off.  
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Internal 1.1V voltage reference without external bypass capacitor, disconnected  
from PB0 (AREF).  
Internal 1.1V voltage reference with external bypass capacitor at PB0 (AREF)  
pin.  
Internal 2.56V voltage reference without external bypass capacitor,  
disconnected from PB0 (AREF).(1)  
Internal 2.56V voltage reference with external bypass capacitor at PB0 (AREF)  
pin.(1)  
Note:  
1. The device requires a supply voltage of 3V in order to generate 2.56V reference voltage.  
112  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
• Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result  
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC data register. Write one to ADLAR to left  
adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the ADLAR bit will affect the ADC data register  
immediately, regardless of any ongoing conversions. For a complete description of this bit, see Section 17.7.7 “The ADC  
Data Register – ADCL and ADCH” on page 115.  
• Bits 3:0 – MUX3:0: Analog Channel and Gain Selection Bits  
The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC. In case of differential input  
(ADC0 - ADC1 or ADC2 - ADC3), gain selection is also made with these bits. Selecting ADC2 or ADC0 as both inputs to the  
differential gain stage enables offset measurements. Selecting the single-ended channel ADC4 enables the temperature  
sensor. Refer to Table 17-4 on page 113 for details. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go into  
effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set).  
Table 17-4. Input Channel Selections  
Positive Differential Negative Differential  
MUX3..0  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101(1)  
0110  
0111  
Single Ended Input  
ADC0 (PB5)  
Input  
Input  
Gain  
ADC1 (PB2)  
N/A  
ADC2 (PB4)  
ADC3 (PB3)  
ADC2 (PB3)  
ADC2 (PB3)  
ADC2 (PB3)  
ADC2 (PB3)  
ADC0 (PB5)  
ADC0 (PB5)  
ADC0 (PB5)  
ADC0 (PB5)  
ADC2 (PB3)  
ADC2 (PB3)  
ADC3 (PB4)  
ADC3 (PB4)  
ADC0 (PB5)  
ADC0 (PB5)  
ADC1 (PB2)  
ADC1 (PB2)  
1x  
20x  
1x  
20x  
1x  
N/A  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
20x  
1x  
20x  
1.1V/2.56V  
0V  
N/A  
N/A  
1111  
ADC4(2)  
Notes: 1. For offset calibration only. See Section 17.2 “Operation” on page 102  
2. For temperature sensor  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
113  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
17.7.6 ADC Control and Status Register A – ADCSRA  
Bit  
7
ADEN  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
ADIF  
R/W  
0
3
ADIE  
R/W  
0
2
1
0
ADSC ADATE  
ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 ADCSRA  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable  
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the ADC off while a conversion is  
in progress, will terminate this conversion.  
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion  
In single conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In free running mode, write this bit to one to start the  
first conversion.  
The first conversion after ADSC has been written after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same time as  
the ADC is enabled, will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs initialization of the  
ADC. ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete, it returns to zero.  
Writing zero to this bit has no effect.  
• Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable  
When this bit is written to one, auto triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a conversion on a positive edge of  
the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC trigger select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB.  
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the data registers are updated. The ADC conversion complete  
interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set. ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the  
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if  
doing a read-modify-write on ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI instructions  
are used.  
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC conversion complete interrupt is activated.  
• Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits  
These bits determine the division factor between the system clock frequency and the input clock to the ADC.  
Table 17-5. ADC Prescaler Selections  
ADPS2  
ADPS1  
ADPS0  
Division Factor  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
114  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
17.7.7 The ADC Data Register – ADCL and ADCH  
17.7.7.1 ADLAR = 0  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
ADC9  
ADC8  
ADCH  
ADC7  
ADC6  
ADC5  
ADC4  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADC1  
ADC0  
ADCL  
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
5
R
R
0
4
R
R
0
3
R
R
0
2
R
R
0
1
R
R
0
0
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
17.7.7.2 ADLAR = 1  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
ADC9  
ADC8  
ADC7  
ADC6  
ADC5  
ADC4  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADCH  
ADC1  
ADC0  
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADCL  
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers.  
When ADCL is read, the ADC data register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if the result is left adjusted and  
no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH.  
The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from the registers. If ADLAR is set,  
the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result is right adjusted.  
• ADC9:0: ADC Conversion Result  
These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in Section 17.7 “ADC Conversion Result” on page 111.  
17.7.8 ADC Control and Status Register B – ADCSRB  
Bit  
7
BIN  
R/W  
0
6
ACME  
R/W  
0
5
IPR  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
ADTS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADTS1  
R/W  
0
0
ADTS0  
R/W  
0
ADCSRB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7– BIN: Bipolar Input Mode  
The gain stage is working in the unipolar mode as default, but the bipolar mode can be selected by writing the BIN bit in the  
ADCSRB register. In the unipolar mode only one-sided conversions are supported and the voltage on the positive input must  
always be larger than the voltage on the negative input. Otherwise the result is saturated to the voltage reference. In the  
bipolar mode two-sided conversions are supported and the result is represented in the two’s complement form. In the  
unipolar mode the resolution is 10 bits and the bipolar mode the resolution is 9 bits + 1 sign bit.  
• Bit 5 – IPR: Input Polarity Mode  
The input polarity mode allows software selectable differential input pairs and full 10 bit ADC resolution, in the unipolar input  
mode, assuming a pre-determined input polarity. If the input polarity is not known it is actually possible to determine the  
polarity first by using the bipolar input mode (with 9 bit resolution + 1 sign bit ADC measurement). And once determined, set  
or clear the polarity reversal bit, as needed, for a succeeding 10 bit unipolar measurement.  
• Bits 4..3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
115  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
• Bits 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source  
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger an ADC conversion. If ADATE  
is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected interrupt  
flag. Note that switching from a trigger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on  
the trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to free running mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will  
not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC interrupt flag is set.  
Table 17-6. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections  
ADTS2  
ADTS1  
ADTS0  
Trigger Source  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Free running mode  
Analog comparator  
External interrupt request 0  
Timer/Counter compare match A  
Timer/Counter overflow  
Timer/Counter compare match B  
Pin change interrupt request  
17.7.9 Digital Input Disable Register 0 – DIDR0  
Bit  
7
6
5
ADC0D  
R/W  
0
4
ADC2D  
R/W  
0
3
ADC3D  
R/W  
0
2
ADC1D  
R/W  
0
1
AIN1D  
R/W  
0
0
AIN0D  
R/W  
0
DIDR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bits 5..2 – ADC3D..ADC0D: ADC3..0 Digital Input Disable  
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is disabled. The corresponding PIN  
register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the ADC3..0 pin and the digital  
input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.  
116  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
18. debugWIRE On-chip Debug System  
18.1 Features  
Complete program flow control  
Emulates all on-chip functions, both digital and analog, except RESET pin  
Real-time operation  
Symbolic debugging support (both at C and assembler source level, or for other HLLs)  
Unlimited number of program break points (using software break points)  
Non-intrusive operation  
Electrical characteristics identical to real device  
Automatic configuration system  
High-speed operation  
Programming of non-volatile memories  
18.2 Overview  
The debugWIRE on-chip debug system uses a one-wire, bi-directional interface to control the program flow, execute AVR®  
instructions in the CPU and to program the different non-volatile memories.  
18.3 Physical Interface  
When the debugWIRE enable (DWEN) fuse is programmed and lock bits are unprogrammed, the debugWIRE system within  
the target device is activated. The RESET port pin is configured as a wire-AND (open-drain) bi-directional I/O pin with pull-up  
enabled and becomes the communication gateway between target and emulator.  
Figure 18-1. The debugWIRE Setup  
1.8 to 5.5V  
VCC  
dw  
dw (RESET)  
GND  
Figure 18-1 shows the schematic of a target MCU, with debugWIRE enabled, and the emulator connector. The system clock  
is not affected by debugWIRE and will always be the clock source selected by the CKSEL fuses.  
When designing a system where debugWIRE will be used, the following observations must be made for correct operation:  
Pull-up resistor on the dW/(RESET) line must be in the range of 10k to 20kΩ. However, the pull-up resistor is optional.  
Connecting the RESET pin directly to VCC will not work.  
Capacitors inserted on the RESET pin must be disconnected when using debugWire.  
All external reset sources must be disconnected.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
117  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
18.4 Software Break Points  
debugWIRE supports program memory break points by the AVR® break instruction. Setting a break point in AVR Studio® will  
insert a BREAK instruction in the program memory. The instruction replaced by the BREAK instruction will be stored. When  
program execution is continued, the stored instruction will be executed before continuing from the program memory. A break  
can be inserted manually by putting the BREAK instruction in the program.  
The flash must be re-programmed each time a break point is changed. This is automatically handled by AVR Studio through  
the debugWIRE interface. The use of break points will therefore reduce the flash data retention. Devices used for debugging  
purposes should not be shipped to end customers.  
18.5 Limitations of debugWIRE  
The debugWIRE communication pin (dW) is physically located on the same pin as external reset (RESET). An external reset  
source is therefore not supported when the debugWIRE is enabled.  
The debugWIRE system accurately emulates all I/O functions when running at full speed, i.e., when the program in the CPU  
is running. When the CPU is stopped, care must be taken while accessing some of the I/O registers via the debugger (AVR  
studio).  
A programmed DWEN fuse enables some parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep modes. This will increase the  
power consumption while in sleep. Thus, the DWEN fuse should be disabled when debugWire is not used.  
18.6 debugWIRE Related Register in I/O Memory  
The following section describes the registers used with the debugWire.  
18.6.1 debugWire Data Register – DWDR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DWDR[7:0]  
DWDR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The DWDR register provides a communication channel from the running program in the MCU to the debugger. This register  
is only accessible by the debugWIRE and can therefore not be used as a general purpose register in the normal operations.  
118  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
19. Self-Programming the Flash  
The device provides a self-programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself. The  
self-programming can use any available data interface and associated protocol to read code and write (program) that code  
into the program memory.  
The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with the data stored in the  
temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page buffer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the  
buffer can be filled either before the page erase command or between a page erase and a page write operation:  
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a page erase  
Fill temporary page buffer  
Perform a page erase  
Perform a page write  
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after page erase  
Perform a page erase  
Fill temporary page buffer  
Perform a page write  
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example in the temporary page  
buffer) before the erase, and then be re-written. When using alternative 1, the boot loader provides an effective  
read-modify-write feature which allows the user software to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write  
back the modified data. If alternative 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is already  
erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that the page address used in  
both the page erase and page write operation is addressing the same page.  
19.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM  
To execute page erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000011” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four  
clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the  
Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will be ignored during this operation.  
The CPU is halted during the page erase operation.  
19.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)  
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write “00000001” to SPMCSR and  
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address  
the data in the temporary buffer. The temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the CTPB bit  
in SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than one time to each address  
without erasing the temporary buffer.  
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM page load operation, all data loaded will be lost.  
19.3 Performing a Page Write  
To execute page write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000101” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock  
cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits  
in the Z-pointer must be written to zero during this operation.  
The CPU is halted during the page write operation.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
119  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
19.4 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming  
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.  
Bit  
15  
Z15  
Z7  
7
14  
Z14  
Z6  
6
13  
Z13  
Z5  
5
12  
Z12  
Z4  
4
11  
Z11  
Z3  
3
10  
Z10  
Z2  
2
9
Z9  
Z1  
1
8
Z8  
Z0  
0
ZH (R31)  
ZL (R30)  
Since the flash is organized in pages (see Table 20-6 on page 126), the program counter can be treated as having two  
different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is addressing the words within a page, while the most  
significant bits are addressing the pages. This is shown in Figure 19-1. Note that the page erase and page write operations  
are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the software addresses the same page in both the  
page erase and page write operation.  
The LPM instruction uses the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the flash byte-by-byte, also the  
LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is used.  
Figure 19-1. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1)  
Bit  
15  
ZPCMSB  
ZPAGEMSB  
1
0
0
Z-register  
PCMSB  
PAGEMSB  
PCWORD  
Program  
Counter  
PCPAGE  
Page Address  
within the Flash  
Word Address  
within a Page  
Program Memory  
Page  
Page  
Instruction Word  
PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]  
00  
01  
02  
PAGEEND  
Note:  
1. The different variables used in Figure 19-1 are listed in Table 20-6 on page 126.  
120  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
19.4.1 Store Program Memory Control and Status Register – SPMCSR  
The store program memory control and status register contains the control bits needed to control the program memory  
operations.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
CTPB  
R/W  
0
3
RFLB  
R/W  
0
2
1
0
PGWRT PGERS SPMEN SPMCSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bits 7..5 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 4 – CTPB: Clear Temporary Page Buffer  
If the CTPB bit is written while filling the temporary page buffer, the temporary page buffer will be cleared and the data will be  
lost.  
• Bit 3 – RFLB: Read Fuse and Lock Bits  
An LPM instruction within three cycles after RFLB and SPMEN are set in the SPMCSR register, will read either the lock bits  
or the fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the destination register. See Section 19.4.2 “EEPROM Write Prevents  
Writing to SPMCSR” on page 121 for details.  
• Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write  
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page write,  
with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1  
and R0 are ignored. The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed  
within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire page write operation.  
• Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase  
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles executes page  
erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will  
auto-clear upon completion of a page erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted  
during the entire page write operation.  
• Bit 0 – SPMEN: Store Program Memory Enable  
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with either CTPB, RFLB,  
PGWRT, or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special meaning, see description above. If only SPMEN is  
written, the following SPM instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer.  
The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SPMEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction, or if no SPM  
instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During page erase and page write, the SPMEN bit remains high until the  
operation is completed.  
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower five bits will have no effect.  
19.4.2 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR  
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to flash. Reading the fuses and lock bits from  
software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It is recommended that the user checks the status bit  
(EEWE) in the EECR register and verifies that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR register.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
121  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
19.4.3 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software  
It is possible to read both the fuse and lock bits from software. To read the lock bits, load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set  
the RFLB and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the RFLB and  
SPMEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the value of the lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The RFLB and SPMEN  
bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the lock bits or if no LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles or no  
SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles. When RFLB and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in the  
Instruction set Manual.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rd  
LB2  
LB1  
The algorithm for reading the fuse low byte is similar to the one described above for reading the lock bits. To read the fuse  
low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the RFLB and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is  
executed within three cycles after the RFLB and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the fuse low byte (FLB)  
will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 20-5 on page 125 for a detailed description and  
mapping of the fuse low byte.  
Bit  
Rd  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLB7  
FLB6  
FLB5  
FLB4  
FLB3  
FLB2  
FLB1  
FLB0  
Similarly, when reading the fuse high byte, load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction is executed within three  
cycles after the RFLB and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the fuse high byte (FHB) will be loaded in the  
destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 20-4 for detailed description and mapping of the fuse high byte.  
Bit  
Rd  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FHB7  
FHB6  
FHB5  
FHB4  
FHB3  
FHB2  
FHB1  
FHB0  
Fuse and lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and lock bits that are unprogrammed, will be read as  
one.  
19.4.4 Preventing Flash Corruption  
During periods of low VCC, the flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is too low for the CPU and the  
flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board level systems using the flash, and the same design  
solutions should be applied.  
A flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a regular write sequence to  
the flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the  
supply voltage for executing instructions is too low.  
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is sufficient):  
1. Keep the AVR® RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can be done by  
enabling the internal brown-out detector (BOD) if the operating voltage matches the detection level. If not, an  
external low VCC reset protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the  
write operation will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.  
2. Keep the AVR core in power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent the CPU from  
attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the SPMCSR register and thus the flash from  
unintentional writes.  
19.4.5 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM  
The calibrated RC oscillator is used to time flash accesses. Table 19-1 shows the typical programming time for flash  
accesses from the CPU.  
Table 19-1. SPM Programming Time  
Symbol  
Min Programming Time  
Max Programming Time  
Flash write (page erase, page write, and write lock  
bits by SPM)  
3.7ms  
4.5ms  
122  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
20. Memory Programming  
This section describes the different methods for programming the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 memories.  
20.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits  
The ATtiny25/45/85 provides two lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can be programmed (“0”) to obtain the  
additional security listed in Table 20-2. The lock bits can only be erased to “1” with the chip erase command.  
Program memory can be read out via the debugWIRE interface when the DWEN fuse is programmed, even if the lock bits  
are set. Thus, when lock bit security is required, should always debugWIRE be disabled by clearing the DWEN fuse.  
Table 20-1. Lock Bit Byte(1)  
Lock Bit Byte  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
LB2  
LB1  
Lock bit  
Lock bit  
Note:  
1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
Table 20-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2)  
Memory Lock Bits  
Protection Type  
LB Mode  
1
LB2  
1
LB1  
1
No memory lock features enabled.  
Further programming of the flash and EEPROM is disabled in high-voltage  
and serial programming mode. The fuse bits are locked in both serial and  
high-voltage programming mode(1). debugWire is disabled.  
2
3
1
0
0
0
Further programming and verification of the flash and EEPROM is disabled in  
high-voltage and serial programming mode. The fuse bits are locked in both  
serial and high-voltage programming mode(1). debugWire is disabled.  
Notes: 1. Program the fuse bits before programming the LB1 and LB2.  
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
123  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
 
20.2 Fuse Bytes  
The Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 has three fuse bytes. Table 20-4, Table 20-5 and Table 20-6 on page 126 describe briefly the  
functionality of all the fuses and how they are mapped into the fuse bytes. Note that the fuses are read as logical zero, “0”, if  
they are programmed.  
Table 20-3. Fuse Extended Byte  
Fuse High Byte  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
SELFPRGEN  
Self-programming enable  
Table 20-4. Fuse High Byte  
Fuse High Byte  
RSTDISBL(1)  
DWEN(2)  
Bit No Description  
Default Value  
7
6
5
4
External reset disable  
1 (unprogrammed)  
DebugWIRE enable  
1 (unprogrammed)  
SPIEN(3)  
WDTON(4)  
Enable serial program and data downloading  
Watchdog timer always on  
0 (programmed, SPI prog. enabled)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
EEPROM memory is preserved through the  
chip erase  
1 (unprogrammed, EEPROM not  
preserved)  
EESAVE  
3
BODLEVEL2(5)  
BODLEVEL1(5)  
BODLEVEL0(5)  
2
1
0
Brown-out detector trigger level  
Brown-out detector trigger level  
Brown-out detector trigger level  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
Notes: 1. See Section 9.3.2 “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 50 for description of RSTDISBL and DWEN fuses.  
2. DWEN must be unprogrammed when lock bit security is required.  
See Section 20.1 “Program And Data Memory Lock Bits” on page 123  
3. The SPIEN fuse is not accessible in SPI programming mode.  
4. See Section 7.9.1 “Watchdog Timer Control Register – WDTCR” on page 38 for details.  
5. See Table 7-2 on page 35 for BODLEVEL fuse decoding.  
6. When programming the RSTDISBL fuse, high-voltage serial programming has to be used to change fuses to  
perform further programming.  
124  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
Table 20-5. Fuse Low Byte  
Fuse Low Byte  
CKDIV8(1)  
CKOUT(2)  
SUT1  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value  
0 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)(3)  
0 (programmed)(3)  
0 (programmed)(4)  
0 (programmed)(4)  
1 (unprogrammed)(4)  
0 (programmed)(4)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Divide clock by 8  
Clock output enable  
Select start-up time  
Select start-up time  
Select clock source  
Select clock source  
Select clock source  
Select clock source  
SUT0  
CKSEL3  
CKSEL2  
CKSEL1  
CKSEL0  
Notes: 1. See Section 5.10 “System Clock Prescaler” on page 26 for details.  
2. The CKOUT fuse allows the system clock to be output on PORTB4.  
See “Section 5.9 “Clock Output Buffer” on page 26 for details.  
3. The default value of SUT1..0 results in maximum start-up time for the default clock source.  
See Table 5-7 on page 23 for details.  
4. The default setting of CKSEL1..0 results in internal RC oscillator at 8.0MHz. See Table 5-6 on page 23 for  
details.  
The status of the fuse bits is not affected by chip erase. Note that the fuse bits are locked if lock bit1 (LB1) is programmed.  
program the fuse bits before programming the lock bits.  
20.2.1 Latching of Fuses  
The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the fuse values will have no effect  
until the part leaves programming mode. This does not apply to the EESAVE fuse which will take effect once it is  
programmed. The fuses are also latched on power-up in normal mode.  
20.3 Signature Bytes  
All Atmel® microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This code can be read in both serial  
and high-voltage programming mode, also when the device is locked. The three bytes reside in a separate address space.  
20.3.1 ATtiny25 Signature Bytes  
1. 0x000: 0x1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel).  
2. 0x001: 0x91 (indicates 2KB flash memory).  
3. 0x002: 0x08 (indicates ATtiny25 device when 0x001 is 0x91).  
20.3.2 ATtiny45 Signature Bytes  
1. 0x000: 0x1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel).  
2. 0x001: 0x92 (indicates 4KB flash memory).  
3. 0x002: 0x06 (indicates ATtiny45 device when 0x001 is 0x92).  
20.3.3 ATtiny85 Signature Bytes  
1. 0x000: 0x1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel).  
2. 0x001: 0x93 (indicates 8KB flash memory).  
3. 0x002: 0x0B (indicates ATtiny85 device when 0x001 is 0x93).  
20.4 Calibration Byte  
Signature area of the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85 has one byte of calibration data for the internal RC oscillator. This byte resides in  
the high byte of address 0x000. During reset, this byte is automatically written into the OSCCAL register to ensure correct  
frequency of the calibrated RC oscillator.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
125  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
20.5 Page Size  
Table 20-6. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash  
Device  
Flash Size  
Page Size  
PCWORD  
No. of Pages  
PCPAGE  
PCMSB  
1Kwords  
(2Kbytes)  
ATtiny25  
16 words  
PC[3:0]  
64  
PC[9:4]  
9
2Kwords  
(4Kbytes)  
ATtiny45  
ATtiny85  
32 words  
32 words  
PC[4:0]  
PC[4:0]  
64  
PC[10:5]  
PC[11:5]  
10  
11  
4Kwords  
(8Kbytes)  
128  
Table 20-7. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM  
Device  
ATtiny25  
ATtiny45  
ATtiny85  
EEPROM Size  
128 bytes  
Page Size  
4 bytes  
PCWORD  
EEA[1:0]  
EEA[1:0]  
EEA[1:0]  
No. of Pages  
PCPAGE  
EEAMSB  
32  
64  
EEA[6:2]  
EEA[7:2]  
EEA[8:2]  
6
7
8
256 bytes  
4 bytes  
512 bytes  
4 bytes  
128  
20.6 Serial Downloading  
Both the flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while RESET is pulled to GND.  
The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO (output). After RESET is set low, the programming enable  
instruction needs to be executed first before program/erase operations can be executed. NOTE, in Table 20-8 on page 126,  
the pin mapping for SPI programming is listed. Not all parts use the SPI pins dedicated for the internal SPI interface.  
Figure 20-1. Serial Programming and Verify(1)  
+4.5V to 5.5V  
VCC  
MOSI  
MISO  
SCK  
RESET  
GND  
Note:  
1. If the device is clocked by the internal oscillator, it is no need to connect a clock source to the CLKI pin.  
Table 20-8. Pin Mapping Serial Programming  
Symbol  
MOSI  
MISO  
SCK  
Pins  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
I/O  
Description  
Serial data in  
Serial data out  
Serial clock  
I
O
I
126  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming operation (in the serial mode  
ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the chip erase instruction. The chip erase operation turns the content of every  
memory location in both the program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF.  
Depending on CKSEL fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods for the serial clock (SCK)  
input are defined as follows:  
Low: > 2CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3CPU clock cycles for fck 12MHz  
High: > 2CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3CPU clock cycles for fck 12MHz  
20.6.1 Serial Programming Algorithm  
When writing serial data to the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.  
When reading data from the Atmel ATtiny25/45/85, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure 20-2 on page 128  
and Figure 20-3 on page 129 for timing details.  
To program and verify the ATtiny25/45/85 in the serial programming mode, the following sequence is recommended (see  
four byte instruction formats in Table 20-10 on page 128):  
1. Power-up sequence:  
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some systems, the programmer can  
not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at  
least two CPU clock cycles duration after SCK has been set to “0”.  
2. Wait for at least 20ms and enable serial programming by sending the programming enable serial instruction to pin  
MOSI.  
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization. When in sync.  
the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the third byte of the programming enable instruction. Whether  
the echo is correct or not, all four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give  
RESET a positive pulse and issue a new programming enable command.  
4. The flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying the 5  
LSB of the address and data together with the load program memory page instruction. To ensure correct loading  
of the page, the data low byte must be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The program  
memory page is stored by loading the write program memory page instruction with the 6 MSB of the address. If  
polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page.  
(See Table 20-9 on page 128.) Accessing the serial programming interface before the flash write operation  
completes can result in incorrect programming.  
5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and data together with the  
appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first automatically erased before new data is  
written. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte. (See  
Table 20-9 on page 128.) In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.  
B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by  
supplying the 2 LSB of the address and data together with the Load EEPROM memory page instruction. The  
EEPROM memory page is stored by loading the write EEPROM memory page Instruction with the 6 MSB of the  
address. When using EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the Load EEPROM memory page  
instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the used must  
wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next page (See Table 20-7 on page 126). In a chip erased device, no  
0xFF in the data file(s) need to be programmed.  
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the read instruction which returns the content at the selected  
address at serial output MISO.  
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal operation.  
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):  
Set RESET to “1”.  
Turn VCC power off.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
127  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 20-9. Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location  
Symbol  
tWD_FLASH  
tWD_EEPROM  
tWD_ERASE  
tWD_FUSE  
Minimum Wait Delay  
4.5ms  
4.0ms  
4.0ms  
4.5ms  
Figure 20-2. Serial Programming Waveforms  
Serial Data Input  
MSB  
LSB  
(MOSI)  
Serial Data Output  
MSB  
LSB  
(MISO)  
Serial Clock Input  
(SCK)  
Sample  
Table 20-10. Serial Programming Instruction Set  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte 3  
Byte4  
Operation  
Enable serial programming after  
RESET goes low.  
Programming enable  
Chip erase  
1010 1100  
1010 1100  
0101 0011  
100x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx Chip erase EEPROM and flash.  
Read H (high or low) data o from  
Read program memory  
0010 H000 0000 000a bbbb bbbb oooo oooo program memory at word address  
a:b.  
Write H (high or low) data i to  
program memory page at word  
Load program memory page 0100 H000  
000x xxxx  
xxxb bbbb  
iiii iiii  
address b. Data low byte must be  
loaded before data high byte is  
applied within the same address.  
Write Program memory page at  
address a:b.  
Write program memory page 0100 1100 0000 000a  
bbxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
Read data o from EEPROM memory  
at address b.  
Read EEPROM memory  
Write EEPROM memory  
1010 0000  
1100 0000  
000x xxxx xxbb bbbb oooo oooo  
Write data i to EEPROM memory at  
address b.  
000x xxxx xxbb bbbb  
iiii iiii  
iiii iiii  
Load data i to EEPROM memory  
page buffer. After data is loaded,  
program EEPROM page.  
Load EEPROM memory  
page (Page access)  
1100 0001 0000 0000 0000 00bb  
Write EEPROM memory  
Page (page access)  
1100 0010  
00xx xxxx  
xxbb bb00  
xxxx xxxx Write EEPROM page at address b.  
Read Lock bits. “0” = programmed,  
xxoo oooo “1” = unprogrammed. See Table 20-1  
on page 123 for details.  
Read lock bits  
0101 1000 0000 0000  
xxxx xxxx  
Note:  
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, H = 0 – Low byte, 1 – high byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t  
care  
128  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 20-10. Serial Programming Instruction Set (Continued)  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte 3  
Byte4  
Operation  
Write lock bits. Set bits = “0” to  
program lock bits. See Table 20-1 on  
page 123 for details.  
Write lock bits  
Read signature byte  
Write fuse bits  
1010 1100  
0011 0000  
111x xxxx  
000x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
11ii iiii  
xxxx xxbb oooo oooo Read signature byte o at address b.  
Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to  
unprogram. See Table 20-5 on page  
125 for details.  
1010 1100 1010 0000  
1010 1100 1010 1000  
1010 1100 1010 0100  
0101 0000 0000 0000  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
iiii iiii  
iiii iiii  
Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to  
unprogram. See Table 20-4 on page  
124 for details.  
Write fuse high bits  
Write extended fuse bits  
Read fuse bits  
Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to  
xxxx xxxi unprogram. See Table 20-3 on page  
124 for details.  
Read fuse bits. “0” = programmed,  
xxxx xxxx oooo oooo “1” = unprogrammed. See Table 20-5  
on page 125 for details.  
Read fuse high bits.  
“0” = pro-grammed,  
“1” = unprogrammed. See Table 20-4  
on page 124 for details.  
Read fuse high bits  
0101 1000 0000 1000  
0101 0000 0000 1000  
xxxx xxxx oooo oooo  
Read extended fuse bits.  
“0” = pro-grammed,  
xxxx xxxx oooo oooo  
Read extended fuse bits  
Read calibration byte  
Poll RDY/BSY  
“1” = unprogrammed. See Table 20-3  
on page 124 for details.  
0011 1000  
1111 0000  
000x xxxx  
0000 0000  
0000 0000 oooo oooo Read calibration byte  
If o = “1”, a programming operation is  
still busy. Wait until this bit returns to  
“0” before applying another  
command.  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxo  
Note:  
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, H = 0 – Low byte, 1 – high byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t  
care  
20.6.2 Serial Programming Characteristics  
Figure 20-3. Serial Programming Timing  
MOSI  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
tSLSH  
SCK  
tSHSL  
MISO  
tSLIV  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
129  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 20-11. Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = –40°C to 125°C, VCC = 2.7 to 5.5V (Unless Otherwise Noted)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Min  
0
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Oscillator frequency (ATtiny25/45/85V)  
Oscillator period (ATtiny25/45/85V)  
Oscillator frequency (ATtiny25/45/85L, VCC = 2.7 to 5.5V)  
Oscillator period (ATtiny25/45/85L, VCC = 2.7 to 5.5V)  
Oscillator frequency (ATtiny25/45/85, VCC = 4.5V to 5.5V)  
Oscillator period (ATtiny25/45/85, VCC = 4.5V to 5.5V)  
SCK pulse width high  
4
250  
0
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
10  
20  
MHz  
ns  
100  
0
MHz  
ns  
50  
tSHSL  
2 tCLCL*  
2 tCLCL*  
tCLCL  
2 tCLCL  
ns  
SCK pulse width low  
tSLSH  
ns  
MOSI setup to SCK high  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
ns  
MOSI hold after SCK high  
ns  
Note:  
2 tCLCL for fck < 12MHz, 3 tCLCL for fck 12MHz  
20.7 High-voltage Serial Programming  
This section describes how to program and verify flash program memory, EEPROM data memory, lock bits and fuse bits in  
the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85.  
Figure 20-4. High-voltage Serial Programming  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1)  
tIVSH  
tSHIX  
tSLSH  
SCI (PB3)  
tSHSL  
SDO (PB2)  
tSHOV  
Table 20-12. Pin Name Mapping  
Signal Name in High-voltage Serial  
Programming Mode  
Pin Name  
PB0  
I/O  
Function  
SDI  
SII  
I
I
Serial data input  
PB1  
Serial instruction input  
Serial data output  
SDO  
SCI  
PB2  
O
I
PB3  
Serial clock input (min. 220ns period)  
130  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 20-13. High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics TA = 25°C ±10%, VCC = 5.0V ±10% (Unless otherwise  
noted)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
tSHSL  
Min  
125  
125  
50  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
SCI (PB3) pulse width high  
SCI (PB3) pulse width low  
tSLSH  
ns  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) Valid to SCI (PB3) high  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) hold after SCI (PB3) high  
SCI (PB3) high to SDO (PB2) valid  
Wait after Instr. 3 for write fuse bits  
tIVSH  
ns  
tSHIX  
50  
ns  
tSHOV  
16  
ns  
tWLWH_PFB  
2.5  
ms  
Table 20-14. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode  
Pin  
SDI  
SII  
Symbol  
Prog_enable[0]  
Value  
0
0
0
Prog_enable[1]  
Prog_enable[2]  
SDO  
20.8 High-voltage Serial Programming Algorithm Sequence  
To program and verify the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 in the high-voltage serial programming mode, the following sequence is  
recommended (See instruction formats in Table 20-16):  
20.8.1 Enter High-voltage Serial Programming Mode  
The following algorithm puts the device in high-voltage serial programming mode:  
1. Apply 4.5 to 5.5V between VCC and GND.  
2. Set RESET pin to “0” and toggle SCI at least six times.  
3. Set the prog_enable pins listed in Table 20-14 to “000” and wait at least 100ns.  
4. Apply VHVRST – 5.5V to RESET. Keep the prog_enable pins unchanged for at least tHVRST after the high-voltage  
has been applied to ensure the prog_enable signature has been latched.  
5. Shortly after latching the prog_enable signature, the device will actively output data on the prog_enable[2]/SDO  
pin, and the resulting drive contention may increase the power consumption. To minimize this drive contention,  
release the prog_enable[2] pin after tHVRST has elapsed.  
6. Wait at least 50µs before giving any serial instructions on SDI/SII.  
Table 20-15. High-voltage Reset Characteristics  
Minimum High-voltage Period for Latching  
Supply Voltage  
RESET Pin High-voltage Threshold  
Prog_enable  
VCC  
4.5V  
5.5V  
VHVRST  
11.5V  
11.5V  
tHVRST  
100ns  
100ns  
20.8.2 Considerations for Efficient Programming  
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient programming, the following  
should be considered.  
The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory locations.  
Skip writing the data value 0xFF that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the EESAVE fuse is programmed)  
and flash after a chip erase.  
Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word window in flash or 256 byte  
EEPROM. This consideration also applies to signature bytes reading.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
131  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
20.8.3 Chip Erase  
The chip erase will erase the flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus lock bits. The lock bits are not reset until the program  
memory has been completely erased. The fuse bits are not changed. A chip erase must be performed before the flash  
and/or EEPROM are re-programmed.  
Note:  
1. The EEPROM memory is preserved during chip erase if the EESAVE fuse is programmed.  
1. Load command “chip erase” (see Table 20-16 on page 134).  
2. Wait after instr. 3 until SDO goes high for the “chip erase” cycle to finish.  
3. Load command “no operation”.  
20.8.4 Programming the Flash  
The flash is organized in pages, see Table 20-10 on page 128. When programming the flash, the program data is latched  
into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be programmed simultaneously. The following procedure  
describes how to program the entire flash memory:  
1. Load command “write flash” (see Table 20-16 on page 134).  
2. Load flash page buffer.  
3. Load flash high address and program page. Wait after instr. 3 until SDO goes high for the “page programming”  
cycle to finish.  
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire flash is programmed or until all data has been programmed.  
5. End page programming by loading command “no operation”.  
When writing or reading serial data to the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85, data is clocked on the rising edge of the serial clock, see  
Figure 20-6 on page 133, Figure 20-7 on page 136 and Figure 20-17 on page 136 for details.  
Figure 20-5. Addressing the Flash which is Organized in Pages  
PCMSB  
PAGEMSB  
PCWORD  
Program  
Counter  
PCPAGE  
Page Address  
within the Flash  
Word Address  
within a Page  
Program Memory  
Page  
Page  
PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]  
00  
Instruction Word  
01  
02  
PAGEEND  
132  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 20-6. High-voltage Serial Programming Waveforms  
SDI  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
PB0  
SII  
PB1  
MSB  
SDO  
PB2  
MSB  
LSB  
SCI  
PB3  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
20.8.5 Programming the EEPROM  
The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 20-11 on page 130. When programming the EEPROM, the data is latched  
into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for the  
EEPROM data memory is as follows (refer to Table 20-16 on page 134):  
1. Load command “write EEPROM”.  
2. Load EEPROM page buffer.  
3. Program EEPROM page. Wait after instr. 2 until SDO goes high for the “page programming” cycle to finish.  
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire EEPROM is programmed or until all data has been programmed.  
5. End page programming by loading command “no operation”.  
20.8.6 Reading the Flash  
The algorithm for reading the flash memory is as follows (refer to Table 20-16 on page 134):  
1. Load command “read flash”.  
2. Read flash low and high bytes. The contents at the selected address are available at serial output SDO.  
20.8.7 Reading the EEPROM  
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to Table 20-16 on page 134):  
1. Load command “read EEPROM”.  
2. Read EEPROM byte. The contents at the selected address are available at serial output SDO.  
20.8.8 Programming and Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits  
The algorithms for programming and reading the fuse low/high bits and lock bits are shown in Table 20-16 on page 134.  
20.8.9 Reading the Signature Bytes and Calibration Byte  
The algorithms for reading the signature bytes and calibration byte are shown in Table 20-16 on page 134.  
20.8.10 Power-off sequence  
Set SCI to “0”. Set RESET to “1”. Turn VCC power off.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
133  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 20-16. High-voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny25/45/85  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Instr.1/5  
Instr.2/6  
Instr.3  
Instr.4  
Operation Remarks  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_1000_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Wait after Instr.3 until SDO  
goes high for the chip erase  
cycle to finish.  
Chip erase  
Load “write  
flash”  
command  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0001_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Enter flash programming  
code.  
Repeat after Instr. 1 - 5 until  
the entire page buffer is filled  
or until all data within the  
page is filled. See note 1.  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_ bbbb_bbbb _00 0_eeee_eeee_00 0_dddd_dddd_00 0_0000_0000_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0011_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0111_1101_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load flash  
page buffer  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Instr 5.  
Wait after Instr 3 until SDO  
goes high. Repeat Instr. 2 - 3  
for each loaded flash page  
until the entire flash or all  
data is programmed. Repeat  
Instr. 1 for a new 256 byte  
page. See note 1.  
Load flash  
high address  
and program  
page  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_000a_00  
0_0001_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load “read  
flash”  
command  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0010_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Enter flash read mode.  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_bbbb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_000a_00  
0_0001_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00 Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 6 for each  
0_0110_1100_00 new address. Repeat Instr. 2  
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx for a new 256 byte page.  
Read flash  
low and high  
bytes  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
p_pppp_pppx_xx  
Instr 5 - 6.  
Load “write  
EEPROM”  
command  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0001_0001_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Enter EEPROM  
programming mode.  
Repeat Instr. 1 - 4 until the  
0_0000_0000_00  
Load  
EEPROM  
page buffer  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_00bb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_eeee_eeee_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1101_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
entire page buffer is filled or  
0_0110_1100_00  
until all data within the page  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
is filled. See note 2.  
Wait after Instr. 2 until SDO  
goes high. Repeat Instr. 1 - 2  
for each loaded EEPROM  
page until the entire  
EEPROM or all data is  
programmed.  
Program  
EEPROM  
page  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Note:  
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, d = data in high bits, e = data in low bits, p = data out high bits,  
q = data out low bits,  
x = don’t care, 1 = lock Bit1, 2 = lock bit2, 3 = CKSEL0 fuse, 4 = CKSEL1 fuse, 5 = SUT0 fuse, 6 = SUT1 fuse,  
7 = CKDIV8, fuse, 8 = WDTON fuse, 9 = EESAVE fuse, A = SPIEN fuse, B = RSTDISBL fuse,  
C = BODLEVEL0 fuse, D= BODLEVEL1 fuse, E = MONEN fuse, F = SPMEN fuse  
Notes: 1. For page sizes less than 256 words, parts of the address (bbbb_bbbb) will be parts of the page address.  
2. For page sizes less than 256 bytes, parts of the address (bbbb_bbbb) will be parts of the page address.  
3. The EEPROM is written page-wise. But only the bytes that are loaded into the page are actually written to the  
EEPROM. Page-wise EEPROM access is more efficient when multiple bytes are to be written to the same  
page. Note that auto-erase of EEPROM is not available in high-voltage serial programming, only in SPI  
programming.  
134  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Table 20-16. High-voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny25/45/85 (Continued)  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Instr.1/5  
Instr.2/6  
Instr.3  
Instr.4  
Operation Remarks  
Repeat Instr. 1 - 5 for each  
new address. Wait after Instr.  
5 until SDO goes high. See  
Note 3.  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_00bb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_eeee_eeee_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1101_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Write  
EEPROM  
byte  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Instr. 5  
Load “read  
EEPROM”  
command  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0011_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Enter EEPROM read mode.  
Read  
EEPROM  
byte  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_bbbb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_aaaa_aaaa_00  
0_0001_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00 Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 4 for each  
0_0110_1100_00 new address. Repeat Instr. 2  
q_qqqq_qqq0_00 for a new 256 byte page.  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0100_0100_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_A987_6543_00 0_0000_0000_00  
0_0000_0000_00 Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO  
0_0110_1100_00 goes high. Write A - 3 = “0” to  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx program the fuse bit.  
Write fuse low  
bits  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0100_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_000F_EDCB_00 0_0000_0000_00  
0_0000_0000_00 Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO  
0_0111_1100_00 goes high. Write F - B = “0” to  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx program the fuse bit.  
Write fuse  
high bits  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0111_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
SDI  
0_0010_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0021_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00 Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO  
0_0110_1100_00 goes high. Write 2 - 1 = “0” to  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx program the lock bit.  
Write lock bits SII  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0100_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
A_9876_543x_xx  
Read fuse low  
bits  
Reading A - 3 = “0” means  
the fuse bit is programmed.  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0100_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1010_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1110_00  
x_xxFE_DCBx_xx  
Read fuse  
high bits  
Reading F - B = “0” means  
the fuse bit is programmed.  
SDI  
0_0000_0100_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
x_xxxx_x21x_xx  
Reading 2, 1 = “0” means the  
lock bit is programmed.  
Read lock bits SII  
SDO  
Read  
signature  
bytes  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_1000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_00bb_00 0_0000_0000_00  
0_0000_0000_00  
Repeats Instr 2 4 for each  
0_0110_1100_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
signature byte address.  
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx  
Read  
calibration  
byte  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_1000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
p_pppp_pppx_xx  
Load “no  
operation”  
command  
SDI  
SII  
SDO  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Note:  
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, d = data in high bits, e = data in low bits, p = data out high bits,  
q = data out low bits,  
x = don’t care, 1 = lock Bit1, 2 = lock bit2, 3 = CKSEL0 fuse, 4 = CKSEL1 fuse, 5 = SUT0 fuse, 6 = SUT1 fuse,  
7 = CKDIV8, fuse, 8 = WDTON fuse, 9 = EESAVE fuse, A = SPIEN fuse, B = RSTDISBL fuse,  
C = BODLEVEL0 fuse, D= BODLEVEL1 fuse, E = MONEN fuse, F = SPMEN fuse  
Notes: 1. For page sizes less than 256 words, parts of the address (bbbb_bbbb) will be parts of the page address.  
2. For page sizes less than 256 bytes, parts of the address (bbbb_bbbb) will be parts of the page address.  
3. The EEPROM is written page-wise. But only the bytes that are loaded into the page are actually written to the  
EEPROM. Page-wise EEPROM access is more efficient when multiple bytes are to be written to the same  
page. Note that auto-erase of EEPROM is not available in high-voltage serial programming, only in SPI  
programming.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
135  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
20.9 High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics  
Figure 20-7. High-voltage Serial Programming Timing  
V
CC  
RESET  
1 CK Cycle  
WDT  
Time-out  
tTOUT  
RESET  
Time-out  
Internal  
Reset  
Table 20-17. High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics TA = 25°C ±10%, VCC = 5.0V ±10% (Unless otherwise  
noted)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
tSHSL  
Min  
110  
110  
50  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
SCI (PB3) pulse width high  
SCI (PB3) pulse width low  
tSLSH  
ns  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) valid to SCI (PB3) high  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) hold after SCI (PB3) high  
SCI (PB3) high to SDO (PB2) valid  
Wait after Instr. 3 for write fuse bits  
tIVSH  
ns  
tSHIX  
50  
ns  
tSHOV  
16  
ns  
tWLWH_PFB  
2.5  
ms  
136  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
21. Electrical Characteristics  
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating  
only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this  
specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
Parameters  
Min.  
– 40  
– 65  
Typ.  
Max.  
+ 125  
+ 150  
Unit  
°C  
Operating temperature  
Storage temperature  
°C  
Voltage on any pin except RESET  
with respect to ground  
– 0.5  
– 0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
+ 13.0  
V
Voltage on RESET with respect to ground  
Maximum operating voltage  
DC current per I/O pin  
V
V
6.0  
40.0  
200.0  
mA  
mA  
DC current VCC and GND pins  
Table 21-1. DC Characteristics TA = – 40°C to 125°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)(1)  
Parameter  
Condition  
Symbol  
Min.(2)  
Typ.  
Max.(3)  
Units  
Except RESET and XTAL  
pins  
Input low voltage  
VIL  
– 0.5  
0.3VCC  
V
Input low voltage  
Input low voltage  
XTAL pin  
VIL1  
VIL2  
– 0.5  
– 0.5  
0.1VCC  
0.1VCC  
V
V
RESET pin  
Except RESET and XTAL  
pins  
(3)  
Input high-voltage  
VIH  
0.6VCC  
VCC + 0.5  
V
(3)  
Input high-voltage  
Input high-voltage  
XTAL pin  
VIH1  
VIH2  
0.9VCC  
0.9VCC  
VCC + 0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
V
V
(3)  
RESET pin  
Output low voltage(4)  
(port B) except PB5  
Output high-voltage(5)  
(port B) except PB5  
IOL = 8mA, VCC = 5V  
IOL = 5mA, VCC = 3V  
0.6  
0.5  
V
V
VOL  
VOH  
IOH = –8mA, VCC = 5V  
IOH = –5mA, VCC = 3V  
4.1  
2.3  
V
V
Output low voltage(4)  
PB5  
Output High-voltage(5)  
PB5  
IOL = 1mA  
VOL1  
VOH1  
0.6  
V
V
IOH = –200µA, VCC = 5V  
3.2  
Notes: 1. All DC characteristics contained in this data sheet result from actual silicon characterization.  
2. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.  
3. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.  
4. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (8mA at VCC = 5V, 5mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 60mA.  
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. pins are not guaranteed to sink current  
greater than the listed test condition.  
5. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (8mA at VCC = 5V, 5mA at VCC = 3V) under steady  
state conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOH, for all ports, should not exceed 60mA.  
If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current  
greater than the listed test condition.  
6. All I/O modules are turned off (PRR = 0xFF) for all ICC values.  
7. Brown-out detection (BOD) disabled.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
137  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Table 21-1. DC Characteristics TA = – 40°C to 125°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)(1) (Continued)  
Parameter  
Condition  
Symbol  
Min.(2)  
Typ.  
Max.(3)  
Units  
Input leakage  
Current I/O pin except  
RESET  
Vcc = 5.5V, pin low  
(absolute value)  
IIL  
50  
nA  
Input leakage  
current I/O pin except  
RESET  
Vcc = 5.5V, pin high  
(absolute value)  
IIH  
50  
nA  
Reset pull-up resistor  
I/O pin pull-up resistor  
RRST  
Rpu  
30  
20  
60  
50  
3
kΩ  
kΩ  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
Active 4MHz, VCC = 3V  
Active 8MHz, VCC = 5V  
Active 16MHz, VCC = 5V  
Idle 4MHz, VCC = 3V  
1.25  
5
10  
15  
0.5  
2
10  
0.4  
1.2  
2.5  
5
Power supply current  
Idle 8MHz, VCC = 5V  
(6)  
ICC  
Idle 16MHz, VCC = 5V  
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V  
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V  
WDT enabled, VCC = 5V  
WDT disabled, VCC = 5V  
5
30  
24  
50  
36  
2
µA  
Power-down mode(7)  
9
µA  
3
µA  
Notes: 1. All DC characteristics contained in this data sheet result from actual silicon characterization.  
2. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.  
3. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.  
4. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (8mA at VCC = 5V, 5mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 60mA.  
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. pins are not guaranteed to sink current  
greater than the listed test condition.  
5. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (8mA at VCC = 5V, 5mA at VCC = 3V) under steady  
state conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOH, for all ports, should not exceed 60mA.  
If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current  
greater than the listed test condition.  
6. All I/O modules are turned off (PRR = 0xFF) for all ICC values.  
7. Brown-out detection (BOD) disabled.  
21.2 External Clock Drive Waveforms  
Figure 21-1. External Clock Drive Waveforms  
tCHCX  
tCLCH  
tCHCL  
tCHCX  
VIH1  
VIL1  
tCLCX  
tCLCL  
138  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
21.3 External Clock Drive  
Table 21-2. External Clock Drive(1)  
VCC = 2.7 to 5.5V  
VCC = 4.5 to 5.5V  
Parameter  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Min.  
0
Max.  
Min.  
0
Max.  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Clock frequency  
8
16  
Clock period  
100  
40  
50  
20  
20  
High time  
tCHCX  
ns  
Low time  
tCLCX  
40  
ns  
Rise time  
tCLCH  
1.6  
1.6  
2
0.5  
0.5  
2
µs  
Fall time  
tCHCL  
µs  
Change in period from one clock cycle to the next  
ΔtCLCL  
%
Note:  
1. All DC Characteristics contained in this data sheet result from actual silicon characterization.  
Figure 21-2. Maximum Frequency versus VCC  
16MHz  
8MHz  
Safe Operating  
Area  
2.7V  
4.5V  
5.5V  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
139  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
21.4 ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data  
Table 21-3. ADC Characteristics, Single Ended Channels. – 40°C to +125°C(1)  
Parameter  
Condition  
Symbol  
Min(1)  
Typ(1)  
Max(1)  
Units  
Resolution  
Single ended conversion  
10  
Bits  
Single ended conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200kHz  
2
3
LSB  
LSB  
Single ended conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 1MHz  
Absolute accuracy (Including  
INL, DNL, quantization error,  
gain and offset error)  
Single ended conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200kHz  
noise reduction mode  
1.5  
2.5  
LSB  
LSB  
Single ended conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 1MHz  
noise reduction mode  
Single ended conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200kHz  
Integral non-linearity (INL)  
1
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
Single ended conversion  
Differential non-linearity (DNL) VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200kHz  
0.5  
2.5  
1.5  
Single ended conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200kHz  
Gain error  
Single ended conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200kHz  
Offset error  
Conversion time  
Free running conversion  
13  
50  
260  
µs  
kHz  
V
Clock frequency  
1000  
VCC + 0.3(3)  
Analog supply voltage  
Input voltage  
AVCC  
VIN  
VCC – 0.3(2)  
GND  
VREF – 50mV  
V
Input bandwidth  
38.5  
1.1  
kHz  
V
Internal voltage reference  
Analog input resistance  
VINT  
RAIN  
1.0  
1.2  
100  
MW  
Notes: 1. All DC characteristics contained in this data sheet result from actual silicon characterization.  
2. Minimum for AVCC is 2.7V.  
3. Maximum for AVCC is 5.5V.  
21.5 Calibrated RC Oscillator Accuracy  
Table 21-4. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator  
Frequency  
8.0MHz  
VCC  
3V  
Temperature  
25°C  
Calibration Accuracy  
Factory calibration  
User calibration  
±1%  
7.3 to 8.1MHz  
2.7V to 5.5V  
–40°C ±125°C  
±14%  
140  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
22. Typical Characteristics  
The data contained in this section is extracted from preliminary silicon characterization and will be updated upon final  
characterization.  
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing. All current consumption  
measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and with internal pull-ups enabled. A sine wave generator  
with rail to rail output is used as clock source.  
The power consumption in power-down mode is independent of clock selection.  
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating frequency, loading of I/O pins,  
switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature. The dominating factors are operating voltage and  
frequency.  
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as  
CL × VCC × f where CL = load capacitance, VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin.  
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to function properly at  
frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.  
The difference between current consumption in power-down mode with watchdog timer enabled and power-down mode with  
watchdog timer disabled represents the differential current drawn by the watchdog timer.  
22.1 Active Supply Current  
Figure 22-1. Active Supply Current versus Frequency (0.1 to 1.0MHz)  
0.040  
0.035  
0.030  
5.5V  
5.0V  
4.5V  
4.0V  
0.025  
0.020  
0.015  
0.010  
0.005  
0
3.3V  
2.7V  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
141  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Figure 22-2. Active Supply Current versus Frequency (1 to 20MHz)  
14  
5.5V  
5.0V  
4.5V  
12  
10  
8
4.0V  
6
4
3.3V  
2.7V  
2
0
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 22-3. Active Supply Current versus VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128kHz)  
0.25  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
0.2  
0.15  
0.1  
-40°C  
0.05  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-4. Active Supply Current versus VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz)  
1.8  
1.6  
1.4  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
1.2  
1
-40°C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
142  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Figure 22-5. Active Supply Current versus VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz)  
8
7
125°C  
85°C  
6
5
25°C  
-40°C  
4
3
2
1
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
22.2 Idle Supply Current  
Figure 22-6. Idle Supply Current versus Frequency (0.1 to 1.0MHz)  
0.25  
5.5V  
5.0V  
0.2  
0.15  
0.1  
4.5V  
4.0V  
3.3V  
2.7V  
1.8V  
0.05  
0
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
143  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
Figure 22-7. Idle Supply Current versus Frequency (1 to 20MHz)  
4
3.5  
3
5.5V  
5.0V  
4.5V  
2.5  
2
4.0V  
1.5  
1
3.3V  
2.7V  
0.5  
0
1.8V  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
5.5  
5.5  
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 22-8. Idle Supply Current versus VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128kHz)  
0.25  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
0.2  
-40°C  
0.15  
0.1  
0.05  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-9. Idle Supply Current versus VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz)  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VCC (V)  
144  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
 
Figure 22-10. Idle Supply Current versus VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz)  
2
1.8  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
22.2.1 Using the Power Reduction Register  
The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for the different I/O modules in  
active and idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules are controlled by the power reduction register. See  
Section 6.6 “Power Reduction Register” on page 30 for details.  
Table 22-1. Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values)  
PRR bit  
Typical numbers  
VCC = 3V, F = 4MHz  
270µA  
VCC = 2V, F = 1MHz  
VCC = 5V, F = 8MHz  
1090µA  
PRTIM1  
PRTIM0  
PRUSI  
43µA  
5.0µA  
4.0µA  
13µA  
28µA  
116µA  
25µA  
102µA  
PRADC  
84µA  
351µA  
Table 22-2. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode  
Additional Current consumption compared to Additional Current consumption compared to  
Active with external clock  
Idle with external clock  
PRR bit  
PRTIM1  
PRTIM0  
PRUSI  
(see Figure 22-1 and Figure 22-2)  
(see Figure 22-6 and Figure 22-7)  
17.3%  
1.8%  
1.6%  
5.4%  
68.4%  
7.3%  
6.4%  
PRADC  
21.4%  
It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 22-2 for other VCC and frequency  
settings than listed in Table 22-1.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
145  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
 
22.2.1.1Example 1  
Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with USI, TIMER0, and ADC enabled at VCC = 2.0V and F = 1MHz.  
From Table 22-2 on page 145, third column, we see that we need to add 6.4% for the USI, 7.3% for the TIMER0 module, and  
21.4% for the ADC module. Reading from Figure 22-9, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.25mA at VCC = 3.0V  
and F = 1MHz. The total current consumption in idle mode with USI, TIMER0, and ADC enabled, gives:  
ICCtotal (0.25) mA × (1 + 0.064 + 0.073 + 0.214) 0.337mA  
22.3 Power-Down Supply Current  
Figure 22-11. Power-Down Supply Current versus VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
4
125°C  
3.5  
3
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
85°C  
-40°C  
25°C  
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-12. Power-Down Supply Current versus VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)  
12  
125°C  
-40°C  
10  
8
25°C  
85°C  
6
4
2
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
146  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
22.4 Pin Pull-up  
Figure 22-13. I/O Pin Pull-Up Resistor Current versus Input Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
125°C  
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VOP (V)  
Figure 22-14. I/O Pin Pull-Up Resistor Current versus Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOP (V)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
147  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-15. I/O Pin Pull-Up Resistor Current versus Input Voltage (VCC = 5.0V)  
160  
140  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VOP (V)  
Figure 22-16. Reset Pull-Up Resistor Current versus Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
125°C  
85°C  
5
0
25°C  
-40°C  
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VRESET (V)  
Figure 22-17. Reset Pull-Up Resistor Current versus Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VRESET (V)  
148  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-18. Reset Pull-Up Resistor Current versus Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5.0V)  
140  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
VRESET (V)  
22.5 Pin Driver Strength  
Figure 22-19. I/O Pin Source Current versus Output Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
12  
-40°C  
25°C  
10  
8
85°C  
125°C  
6
4
2
0
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VOL (V)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
149  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-20. I/O Pin Source Current versus Output Voltage (VCC = 3V)  
1.2  
1
125°C  
85°C  
0.8  
25°C  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
-40°C  
0
5
10  
15  
20  
25  
25  
2
IOL (V)  
Figure 22-21. I/O Pin Source Current versus Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
0.7  
125°C  
85°C  
0.6  
0.5  
25°C  
-40°C  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
0
5
10  
15  
20  
IOL (V)  
Figure 22-22. I/O Pin Sink Current versus Output Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
9
8
25°C  
7
6
5
-40°C  
85°C  
125°C  
4
3
2
1
0
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
VOH (V)  
150  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-23. I/O Pin Sink Current versus Output Voltage (VCC = 3V)  
3.5  
3
2.5  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
125°C  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
0
5
10  
15  
20  
25  
IOH (mA)  
Figure 22-24. I/O Pin Sink Current versus Output Voltage (VCC = 5.0V)  
5.1  
5
4.9  
4.8  
4.7  
4.6  
4.5  
4.4  
4.3  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
125°C  
0
5
10  
15  
20  
25  
IOH (mA)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
151  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
22.6 Pin Thresholds and Hysteresis  
Figure 22-25. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIH, I/O Pin Read As '1')  
3
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
2.5  
2
125°C  
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-26. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIL, I/O Pin Read As '0')  
125°C  
85°C  
2.5  
25°C  
-40°C  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
152  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-27. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis versus VCC  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
125°C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-28. Reset Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIH, Reset Pin Read As '1')  
2.5  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-29. Reset Input Threshold Voltage versus VCC (VIL, Reset Pin Read As '0')  
2.5  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VCC (V)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
153  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-30. Reset Input Pin Hysteresis versus VCC  
0.25  
0.2  
0.15  
0.1  
0.05  
0
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
22.7 BOD Thresholds and Analog Comparator Offset  
Figure 22-31. BOD Thresholds versus Temperature (BODLEVEL Is 4.3V)  
4.4  
4.35  
4.3  
Rising  
Falling  
4.25  
4.2  
4.15  
4.1  
4.05  
0
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140  
Temperature (°C)  
154  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-32. BOD Thresholds versus Temperature (BODLEVEL Is 2.7V)  
2.8  
Rising  
Falling  
2.75  
2.7  
2.65  
2.6  
2.55  
0
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140  
Temperature (°C)  
Figure 22-33. BOD Thresholds versus Temperature (BODLEVEL Is 1.8V)  
1.9  
1.85  
1.8  
Rising VCC  
Falling VCC  
1.75  
1.7  
1.65  
1.6  
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10  
0
10 20 30 40  
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140  
Temperature (°C)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
155  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
22.8 Internal Oscillator Speed  
Figure 22-34. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency versus VCC  
)
0.118  
0.116  
0.114  
-40°C  
25°C  
0.112  
0.110  
0.108  
0.106  
0.104  
0.102  
0.1  
85°C  
125°C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-35. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency versus Temperature  
0.118  
0.116  
0.114  
0.112  
0.110  
0.108  
1.8V  
0.106  
0.104  
2.7V  
3.6V  
4.0V  
5.5V  
0.102  
0.1  
-40 -30 -20  
-10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
156  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-36. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency versus Temperature  
8.4  
5.0V  
3.0V  
8.3  
8.2  
8.1  
8
7.9  
7.8  
7.7  
7.6  
7.5  
-40 -30 -20  
-10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
Figure 22-37. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency versus VCC  
8.4  
125°C  
85°C  
8.3  
8.2  
8.1  
8
25°C  
7.9  
7.8  
7.7  
7.6  
7.5  
-40°C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-38. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency versus OSCCAL Value  
14  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
12  
10  
8
-40°C  
6
4
2
0
16  
32  
48  
64  
80  
96  
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
OSCCAL (X1)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
157  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
22.9 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units  
Figure 22-39. Brownout Detector Current versus VCC  
35  
30  
25  
20  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
15  
10  
5
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 22-40. Analog Comparator Current versus VCC  
350  
150°C  
300  
250  
200  
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
150  
100  
50  
0
-40°C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
VCC (V)  
158  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
22.10 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulse width  
Figure 22-41. Reset Supply Current versus VCC (0.1 to 1.0MHz, Excluding Current through the Reset Pull-up)  
0.14  
5.5V  
0.12  
5.0V  
0.1  
4.5V  
4.0V  
0.08  
3.3V  
2.7V  
0.06  
0.04  
0.02  
1.8V  
1
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 22-42. Reset Supply Current versus VCC (1 to 24MHz, Excluding Current through the Reset Pull-up)  
2.5  
5.5V  
5.0V  
4.5V  
2
1.5  
4.0V  
1
3.3V  
0.5  
2.7V  
1.8V  
0
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Frequency (MHz)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
159  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-43. Reset Pulse Width versus VCC  
2500  
2000  
1500  
1000  
500  
0
125°C  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
22.11 Analog to Digital Converter  
Figure 22-44. Analog to Digital Converter Differential Mode OFFSET versus VCC  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
Diff x1  
0
-0.5  
-1  
-1.5  
-2  
Diff x20  
-40 -30 -20  
-10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
160  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-45. Analog to Digital Converter Single Ended Mode OFFSET versus VCC  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
-40 -30 -20  
-10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
Figure 22-46. Analog to Digital Converter Differential Mode GAIN versus VCC  
-1  
-1.2  
-1.4  
-1.6  
-1.8  
-2  
Diff x20  
-2.2  
-2.4  
-2.6  
-2.8  
-3  
Diff x1  
-40 -30  
-20  
-10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
Figure 22-47. Analog to Digital Converter Single Ended Mode GAIN versus VCC  
0
-40 -30 -20 -10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100 100 120  
-0.5  
-1  
-1.5  
-2  
-2.5  
Temperature (°C)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
161  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-48. Analog to Digital Converter Differential Mode DNL versus VCC  
1.2  
Diff x20  
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
Diff x1  
-40 -30  
-20 -10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
Figure 22-49. Analog to Digital Converter Single Ended Mode DNL versus VCC  
0.57  
0.56  
0.55  
0.54  
0.53  
0.52  
0.51  
0.5  
0.49  
0.48  
0.47  
-40 -30  
-20 -10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
Figure 22-50. Analog to Digital Converter Differential Mode INL versus VCC  
1.8  
1.6  
Diff x20  
1.4  
1.2  
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
Diff x1  
-40 -30  
-20 -10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
162  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
Figure 22-51. Analog to Digital Converter Single Ended Mode INL versus VCC  
0.72  
0.7  
0.68  
0.66  
0.64  
0.62  
0.6  
0.58  
-40 -30 -20 -10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100 110 120  
Temperature (°C)  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
163  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
23. Register Summary  
Address  
0x3F  
0x3E  
0x3D  
0x3C  
0x3B  
0x3A  
0x39  
0x38  
0x37  
0x36  
0x35  
0x34  
0x33  
0x32  
0x31  
0x30  
0x2F  
0x2E  
0x2D  
0x2C  
0x2B  
0x2A  
0x29  
0x28  
0x27  
0x26  
0x25  
0x24  
0x23  
0x22  
0x21  
0x20  
0x1F  
0x1E  
0x1D  
0x1C  
Name  
SREG  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
T
Bit 5  
H
Bit 4  
S
Bit 3  
V
Bit 2  
N
Bit 1  
Z
Bit 0  
C
Page  
I
6
9
9
SPH  
SP8  
SP0  
SPL  
SP7  
SP6  
SP5  
SP4  
SP3  
SP2  
SP1  
Reserved  
GIMSK  
GIFR  
INT0  
PCIE  
PCIF  
54  
55  
INTF0  
TIMSK  
TIFR  
OCIE1A OCIE1B OCIE0A OCIE0B TOIE1  
OCF1A OCF1B OCF0A OCF0B TOV1  
TOIE0  
TOV0  
70  
71  
SPMCSR  
Reserved  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
CTPB  
RFLB  
PGWRT PGERS SPMEN  
121  
BODS  
PUD  
SE  
SM1  
SM0  
BODSE  
BORF  
CS02  
ISC01  
EXTRF  
CS01  
ISC00  
PORF  
CS00  
28, 49, 54  
37  
WDRF  
WGM02  
TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B  
69  
TCNT0  
Timer/Counter0  
Oscillator Calibration Register  
70  
OSCCAL  
24  
TCCR1  
TCNT1  
OCR1A  
OCR1C  
GTCCR  
OCR1B  
CTC1 PWM1A COM1A1 COM1A0 CS13  
Timer/Counter1  
CS12  
CS11  
CS10  
77  
79  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register C  
PWM1B COM1B1 COM1B0 FOC1B FOC1A  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B  
79  
79  
TSM  
PSR1  
PSR0  
73, 78  
80  
TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0  
WGM01 WGM00  
66  
OCR0A  
OCR0B  
PLLCSR  
CLKPR  
DT1A  
Timer/Counter0 – Output Compare Register A  
Timer/Counter0 – Output Compare Register B  
70  
70  
SM  
PCKE  
PLLE  
PLOCK  
81  
CLKPCE  
CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0  
26  
DT1AH3 DT1AH2 DT1AH1 DT1AH0 DT1AL3 DT1AL2 DT1AL1 DT1AL0  
DT1BH3 DT1BH2 DT1BH1 DT1BH0 DT1BL3 DT1BL2 DT1BL1 DT1BL0  
87  
DT1B  
87  
DTPS1  
DWDR  
WDTCR  
PRR  
DTPS11 DTPS10  
86  
DWDR[7:0]  
WDCE WDE  
118  
38  
WDTIF WDTIE  
WDP3  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
PRTIM1 PRTIM0 PRUSI PRADC  
EEAR8  
30  
EEARH  
EEARL  
EEDR  
14  
EEAR7 EEAR6 EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0  
EEPROM Data Register  
14  
14  
EECR  
EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMWE EEWE  
EERE  
14  
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory  
addresses should never be written.  
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In  
these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.  
3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and  
SBI instructions will only operation the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status  
Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.  
164  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
23. Register Summary (Continued)  
Address  
0x1B  
0x1A  
0x19  
0x18  
0x17  
0x16  
0x15  
0x14  
0x13  
0x12  
0x11  
0x10  
0x0F  
0x0E  
0x0D  
0x0C  
0x0B  
0x0A  
0x09  
0x08  
0x07  
0x06  
0x05  
0x04  
0x03  
0x02  
0x01  
0x00  
Name  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
PORTB  
DDRB  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Page  
PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0  
53  
53  
DDB5  
PINB5  
DDB4  
PINB4  
DDB3  
PINB3  
DDB2  
PINB2  
DDB1  
PINB1  
DDB0  
PINB0  
PINB  
53  
PCMSK  
DIDR0  
PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0  
55  
ADC0D ADC2D ADC3D ADC1D  
General Purpose I/O Register 2  
General Purpose I/O Register 1  
General Purpose I/O Register 0  
USI Buffer Register  
EIN1D  
AIN0D  
100, 116  
GPIOR2  
GPIOR1  
GPIOR0  
USIBR  
94  
94  
95  
96  
USIDR  
USI Data Register  
USISR  
USICIF USIOIF  
USIPF  
USIDC USICNT3 USICNT2 USICNT1 USICNT0  
USICR  
USISIE USIOIE USIWM1 USIWM0 USICS1 USICS0 USICLK USITC  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ACSR  
ACD  
ACBG  
ACO  
ACI  
ACIE  
MUX3  
ADIE  
ACIS1  
MUX1  
ACIS0  
MUX0  
98  
112  
ADMUX  
ADCSRA  
ADCH  
REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR REFS2  
MUX2  
ADEN  
BIN  
ADSC  
ACME  
ADATE  
ADIF  
ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0  
114  
ADC Data Register High Byte  
ADC Data Register Low Byte  
115  
ADCL  
115  
ADCSRB  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
IPR  
ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0  
98, 115  
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory  
addresses should never be written.  
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In  
these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.  
3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and  
SBI instructions will only operation the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status  
Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
165  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
24. Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonics Operands Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
Arithmetic and Logic Instructions  
ADD  
ADC  
ADIW  
SUB  
SUBI  
SBC  
SBCI  
SBIW  
AND  
ANDI  
OR  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rdl, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rdl, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd  
Add two registers  
Rd Rd + Rr  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,N,V  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Add with carry two registers  
Add immediate to word  
Rd Rd + Rr + C  
Rdh: Rdl Rdh: Rdl + K  
Rd Rd – Rr  
Subtract two registers  
Subtract constant from register  
Subtract with carry two registers  
Rd Rd – K  
Rd Rd – Rr – C  
Subtract with carry constant from Reg. Rd Rd – K – C  
Subtract immediate from word  
Logical AND registers  
Logical AND register and constant  
Logical OR registers  
Logical OR register and constant  
Exclusive OR registers  
One’s complement  
Two’s complement  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl – K  
Rd Rd × Rr  
Rd Rd × K  
Z,N,V  
Rd Rd v Rr  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
ORI  
Z,N,V  
EOR  
COM  
NEG  
SBR  
CBR  
INC  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd 0xFF – Rd  
Rd 0x00 – Rd  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Rd, K  
Rd, K  
Rd  
Set Bit(s) in register  
Clear Bit(s) in register  
Increment  
Rd Rd × (0xFF – K)  
Rd Rd + 1  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
DEC  
TST  
Rd  
Decrement  
Rd Rd – 1  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Test for zero or minus  
Clear register  
Rd Rd × Rd  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd 0xFF  
Z,N,V  
CLR  
SER  
Rd  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Set register  
None  
Branch Instructions  
RJMP  
IJMP  
RCALL  
ICALL  
RET  
k
Relative jump  
PC PC + k + 1  
None  
None  
2
2
Indirect jump to (Z)  
PC Z  
k
Relative subroutine call  
Indirect call to (Z)  
PC PC + k + 1  
None  
3
PC Z  
None  
3
Subroutine return  
PC STACK  
None  
4
RETI  
CPSE  
CP  
Interrupt return  
PC STACK  
I
4
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rr, b  
Rr, b  
P, b  
P, b  
s, k  
Compare, skip if equal  
Compare  
if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3  
Rd – Rr  
None  
1/2/3  
1
Z, N,V,C,H  
Z, N,V,C,H  
Z, N,V,C,H  
None  
CPC  
Compare with carry  
Compare register with immediate  
Skip if bit in register cleared  
Skip if bit in register is set  
Skip if bit in I/O register cleared  
Skip if bit in I/O register is set  
Branch if status flag set  
Branch if status flag cleared  
Branch if equal  
Rd – Rr – C  
1
CPI  
Rd – K  
1
SBRC  
SBRS  
SBIC  
SBIS  
BRBS  
BRBC  
BREQ  
BRNE  
BRCS  
if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (SREG (s) = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (SREG (s) = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
None  
None  
None  
None  
s, k  
None  
k
None  
k
Branch if not equal  
None  
k
Branch if carry set  
None  
166  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
24. Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonics Operands Description  
Operation  
Flags  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
#Clocks  
1/2  
BRCC  
BRSH  
BRLO  
BRMI  
BRPL  
BRGE  
BRLT  
BRHS  
BRHC  
BRTS  
BRTC  
BRVS  
BRVC  
BRIE  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Branch if carry cleared  
Branch if same or higher  
Branch if lower  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
1/2  
1/2  
Branch if minus  
1/2  
Branch if plus  
1/2  
Branch if greater or equal, signed  
Branch if less than zero, signed  
Branch if half carry flag set  
Branch if half carry flag cleared  
Branch if T flag set  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
Branch if T flag cleared  
Branch if overflow flag is set  
Branch if overflow flag is cleared  
Branch if interrupt enabled  
Branch if interrupt disabled  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
BRID  
1/2  
Bit and bit-test instructions  
SBI  
CBI  
P,b  
P,b  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
s
Set bit in I/O register  
Clear bit in I/O register  
Logical shift left  
I/O (P, b) 1  
None  
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I/O (P, b) 0  
None  
LSL  
Rd(n+1) Rd (n), Rd(0) 0  
Z,C,N,V  
LSR  
ROL  
ROR  
ASR  
SWAP  
BSET  
BCLR  
BST  
BLD  
SEC  
CLC  
SEN  
CLN  
SEZ  
CLZ  
SEI  
Logical shift right  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0  
Z,C,N,V  
Rotate left through carry  
Rotate right through carry  
Arithmetic shift right  
Swap nibbles  
Rd(0) C,Rd(n+1) Rd (n), C Rd(7)  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd(7) C, Rd (n) Rd(n+1),C Rd(0)  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd(3.0) Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4) Rd(3..0)  
None  
Flag set  
SREG(s) 1  
SREG(s) 0  
T Rr(b)  
Rd(b) T  
C 1  
SREG(s)  
s
Flag clear  
SREG(s)  
Rr, b  
Rd, b  
Bit Store from register to T  
Bit load from T to register  
Set carry  
T
None  
C
C
N
N
Z
Clear carry  
C 0  
Set negative flag  
N 1  
Clear negative flag  
Set zero flag  
N 0  
Z 1  
Clear zero flag  
Z 0  
Z
Global interrupt enable  
Global interrupt disable  
Set signed test flag  
Clear signed test flag  
Set twos complement overflow.  
Clear twos complement overflow  
Set T in SREG  
I 1  
I
CLI  
I 0  
I
SES  
CLS  
SEV  
CLV  
SET  
CLT  
S 1  
S
S 0  
S
V 1  
V
V 0  
V
T 1  
T
Clear T in SREG  
T 0  
T
SEH  
Set half carry flag in SREG  
H 1  
H
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
167  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
24. Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonics Operands Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
CLH  
Clear half carry flag in SREG  
H 0  
H
1
Data transfer instructions  
MOV  
MOVW  
LDI  
LD  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, X  
Move between registers  
Copy register word  
Load immediate  
Rd Rr  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr  
Rd K  
Load indirect  
Rd (X)  
LD  
Rd, X+ Load indirect and post-inc.  
Rd, - X Load indirect and pre-dec.  
Rd (X), X X + 1  
X X – 1, Rd (X)  
Rd (Y)  
LD  
LD  
Rd, Y  
Load indirect  
LD  
Rd, Y+ Load indirect and post-inc.  
Rd, - Y Load indirect and pre-dec.  
Rd,Y+q Load indirect with displacement  
Rd (Y), Y Y + 1  
Y Y – 1, Rd (Y)  
Rd (Y + q)  
Rd (Z)  
LD  
LDD  
LD  
Rd, Z  
Rd, Z+ Load indirect and post-inc.  
Rd, -Z Load indirect and pre-dec.  
Rd, Z+q Load indirect with displacement  
Load indirect  
LD  
Rd (Z), Z Z+1  
Z Z – 1, Rd (Z)  
Rd (Z + q)  
Rd (k)  
LD  
LDD  
LDS  
ST  
Rd, k  
X, Rr  
Load direct from SRAM  
Store indirect  
(X) Rr  
ST  
X+, Rr  
- X, Rr  
Y, Rr  
Store indirect and post-inc.  
Store indirect and pre-dec.  
Store indirect  
(X) Rr, X X + 1  
X X – 1, (X) Rr  
(Y) Rr  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Y+, Rr  
- Y, Rr  
Store indirect and post-inc.  
Store indirect and pre-dec.  
(Y) Rr, Y Y + 1  
Y Y – 1, (Y) Rr  
(Y + q) Rr  
ST  
STD  
ST  
Y+q,Rr Store indirect with displacement  
Z, Rr  
Z+, Rr  
-Z, Rr  
Store indirect  
(Z) Rr  
ST  
Store indirect and post-inc.  
Store indirect and pre-dec.  
(Z) Rr, Z Z + 1  
Z Z – 1, (Z) Rr  
(Z + q) Rr  
ST  
STD  
STS  
LPM  
LPM  
LPM  
SPM  
IN  
Z+q,Rr Store indirect with displacement  
k, Rr  
Store direct to SRAM  
Load program memory  
Load program memory  
(k) Rr  
R0 (Z)  
Rd, Z  
Rd (Z)  
Rd, Z+ Load program memory and post-inc  
Store program memory  
Rd (Z), Z Z+1  
(z) R1:R0  
Rd, P  
P, Rr  
Rr  
In port  
Rd P  
1
1
2
2
OUT  
PUSH  
POP  
Out port  
P Rr  
Push register on stack  
Pop register from stack  
STACK Rr  
Rd STACK  
Rd  
MCU Control Instructions  
NOP  
SLEEP  
WDR  
No operation  
Sleep  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
(see specific descr. for sleepfunction)  
(see specific descr. for WDR/timer)  
For on-chip debug only  
Watchdog reset  
Break  
1
BREAK  
N/A  
168  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
25. Ordering Information  
Power Supply  
Speed (MHz)  
Ordering Code  
Package  
Operation Range  
ATtiny25/45/85-15ST  
ATtiny25/45/85-15ST1  
ATtiny25/45/85-15SZ  
ATtiny25/45/85-15MT  
ATtiny25/45/85-15MT1  
ATtiny25/45/85-15MZ  
Automotive (–40°C to +85°C)  
Automotive (–40°C to +105°C)  
Automotive (–40°C to +125°C)  
Automotive (–40°C to +85°C)  
Automotive (–40°C to +105°C)  
Automotive (–40°C to +125°C)  
2.7 - 5.5V  
8 - 16(3)  
T5  
2.7 - 5.5V  
8 - 16(3)  
PC  
Notes: 1. Green and ROHS packaging  
2. Tape and Reel with Dry-pack delivery.  
3. For Speed versus VCC,see Figure 21-2 on page 139.  
Table 25-1. Package Type  
Package Type  
T5 - 8-lead, 0.208” body width  
Plastic gull wing small outline package  
T5  
PC - 20-lead, 4.0 x 4.0mm body, 0.50mm pitch  
Quad flat no lead package (QFN)  
PC  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
169  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
26. Packaging Information  
26.1 T5  
0°~ 8°  
8L SOIC .208  
E
E1  
Pin #1  
Identifier  
L
C
e
b
MM  
INCH  
Min  
Max  
2.16  
0.25  
0.48  
0.35  
5.35  
8.26  
5.40  
0.85  
Min  
MAx  
.085  
.010  
.015  
.014  
.211  
.325  
.212  
.033  
D
A
A1  
b
C
D
1.70  
0.05  
0.35  
0.15  
5.13  
7.70  
5.18  
0.51  
.066  
.002  
.014  
.006  
.202  
.303  
.204  
.020  
A
Base  
Plane  
Seating  
Plane  
A1  
E
E1  
L
e
1.27  
0°  
Q
8°  
07/27/07  
REV.  
TITLE  
DRAWING NO.  
T5  
GPC  
T5, 8-Lead, 0.208” Body Width  
Plastic: Quad Wing Small Outline Package (SOIC)  
Package Drawing Contact:  
packagedrawings@atmel.com  
B
170  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
26.2 PC  
ccc  
eee C  
C
DRAWINGS NOT SCALED  
A
A1  
D
E
Laser Mark for Pin 1  
Identification in this Area  
Seating Plane  
B
C
Top View  
Side View  
D2  
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
6
10  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
0.70  
0.00  
3.90  
2.50  
0.35  
0.20  
NOM  
0.75  
MAX  
0.80  
0.05  
4.10  
2.70  
0.55  
0.30  
NOTE  
A
A1  
D/E  
D2/E2  
L
11  
15  
5
0.02  
4.00  
2.60  
E2  
0.45  
b
0.25  
1
e
0.50 BSC  
Tolerances of Form and Position  
0.10  
Pin1 ID  
ccc  
eee  
n
20  
16  
e
0.08  
20  
L
b
See Option A, B  
Option A  
Option B  
Bottom View  
Pin 1# Chamfer Pin 1# Notch  
(C 0.35 max) (0.20 R)  
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only. Refer to JEDEC Drawing MO-220, Variation WGGD-5 for proper dimensions, tolerances, datums, etc.  
(excepted D2/E2 Min et Nom.)  
2. Dimensions b applies to metallized terminal and is measured between 0.15mm and 0.30mm from the terminal tip.  
If the terminal has the optical radius on the other end of the terminal, the dimensions should not be measured in that radius area.  
08/01/14  
REV.  
TITLE  
DRAWING NO.  
PC  
GPC  
ZVF  
Package Drawing Contact:  
packagedrawings@atmel.com  
PC, 20-Lds - 0.50mm Pitch, 4x4x0.8mm Body size  
Very very Thin Quad Flat No Lead Package (WQFN) Sawn  
J
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
171  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
27. Errata  
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the Atmel® ATtiny25/45/85 device.  
27.1 ATtiny25, Revision E  
1. No known errata. Flash security improvements.  
27.2 ATtiny45, Revision G  
1. No known errata. Flash security improvements.  
27.3 ATtiny85, Revision C  
1. No known errata. Flash security improvements.  
28. Revision History  
Please note that the following page numbers referred to in this section refer to the specific revision mentioned, not to this  
document.  
Revision No.  
History  
7598J-AVR-12/14  
7598I-AVR-10/12  
7598H-AVR-07/09  
Put datasheet in the latest template  
Section 27 “Package Information” on page 188 updated  
Absolute Maximum Ratings updated  
Modified Section 6. “Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 28  
Modified Section 6.1 “MCU Control Register – MCUCR” on page 28  
Modified Table 6-2 on page 29.  
7598G-AVR-03/08  
Added Section 6.5 “Limitations” on page 29.  
Modified Section 6.6 “Power Reduction Register” on page 30.  
Correction to ICC Active, Table 21-1 on page 137.  
7598F-AVR-11/07  
7598E-AVR-03/07  
POR updated, see Section 7.3 “Power-on Reset” on page 34  
Clarification of power On reset specifications table.  
7598D-AVR-02/07  
7598C-AVR-09/06  
Errata list updated.  
Added QFN packages.  
Correction of package codification and drawings.  
Clarification of several TBD values  
Addition of the power on reset specification  
7598B-AVR-08/06  
DC characteristics limits completed after corner run characterization  
Typical characteristic curves produced  
Automotive grade created:  
Features:  
Change voltage and temperature range (2.7V – 5.5V), (–40°C, +125°C)  
Adapt Stand-by current to automotive temperature range  
Packages:  
7598A-AVR-04/06  
PDIP removed  
Ordering info limited to automotive versions (green only, dry pack)  
DC and AC parameters  
Only PRELIMINARY values are produced  
172  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
29. Table of Contents  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Pin Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
1.  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Automotive Quality Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Pin Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
2.  
3.  
About Code Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
AVR CPU Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
3.1  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Architectural Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
General Purpose Register File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Stack Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Instruction Execution Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Reset and Interrupt Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
3.7  
3.8  
4.  
5.  
AVR ATtiny25/45/85 Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
4.1  
In-System Re-programmable Flash Program Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
SRAM Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
EEPROM Data Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
I/O Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
System Clock and Clock Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
5.1  
Clock Systems and their Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Clock Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Default Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Crystal Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
External Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
128 kHz Internal Oscillator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Clock Output Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
5.7  
5.8  
5.9  
5.10 System Clock Prescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
6.  
Power Management and Sleep Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
6.5  
6.6  
6.7  
MCU Control Register – MCUCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
ADC Noise Reduction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Power-down Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Power Reduction Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Minimizing Power Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
7.  
System Control and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
7.1  
Resetting the AVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Reset Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Power-on Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
External Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Brown-out Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Watchdog Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
MCU Status Register – MCUSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
7.2  
7.3  
7.4  
7.5  
7.6  
7.7  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
173  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
7.8  
7.9  
Internal Voltage Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
7.10 Timed Sequences for Changing the Configuration of the Watchdog Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
8.  
9.  
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
8.1  
Interrupt Vectors in ATtiny25/45/85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
I/O Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
9.1  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Ports as General Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Alternate Port Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Register Description for I/O-Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
9.2  
9.3  
9.4  
10. External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
10.1 MCU Control Register – MCUCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
10.2 General Interrupt Mask Register – GIMSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
10.3 General Interrupt Flag Register – GIFR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
10.4 Pin Change Mask Register – PCMSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
11. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
11.2 Timer/Counter Clock Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
11.3 Counter Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
11.4 Output Compare Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
11.5 Compare Match Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
11.6 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
11.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
11.8 8-bit Timer/Counter Register Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
12. Timer/Counter Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
12.1 Prescaler Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
12.2 External Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
13. Counter and Compare Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
13.1 Timer/Counter1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
14. Dead Time Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
14.1 Timer/Counter1 Dead Time Prescaler register 1 - DTPS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
14.2 Timer/Counter1 Dead Time A - DT1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
14.3 Timer/Counter1 Dead Time B - DT1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
15. Universal Serial Interface – USI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
15.2 Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
15.3 Alternative USI Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
15.4 USI Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
16. Analog Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
16.1 ADC Control and Status Register B – ADCSRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
16.2 Analog Comparator Control and Status Register – ACSR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
16.3 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
17. Analog to Digital Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
17.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
17.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
17.3 Starting a Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
17.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
17.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
174  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
17.6 ADC Noise Canceler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
17.7 ADC Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
18. debugWIRE On-chip Debug System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
18.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
18.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
18.3 Physical Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
18.4 Software Break Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
18.5 Limitations of debugWIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
18.6 debugWIRE Related Register in I/O Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
19. Self-Programming the Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
19.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
19.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
19.3 Performing a Page Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
19.4 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
20. Memory Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
20.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
20.2 Fuse Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
20.3 Signature Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
20.4 Calibration Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
20.5 Page Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
20.6 Serial Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
20.7 High-voltage Serial Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
20.8 High-voltage Serial Programming Algorithm Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
20.9 High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
21. Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
21.2 External Clock Drive Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
21.3 External Clock Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
21.4 ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
21.5 Calibrated RC Oscillator Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
22. Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
22.1 Active Supply Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
22.2 Idle Supply Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
22.3 Power-Down Supply Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
22.4 Pin Pull-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
22.5 Pin Driver Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
22.6 Pin Thresholds and Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
22.7 BOD Thresholds and Analog Comparator Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
22.8 Internal Oscillator Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
22.9 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
22.10 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulse width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
22.11 Analog to Digital Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
23. Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
24. Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
25. Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
26. Packaging Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
26.1 T5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
26.2 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
175  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
27. Errata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
27.1 ATtiny25, Revision E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
27.2 ATtiny45, Revision G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
27.3 ATtiny85, Revision C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
28. Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
29. Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
176  
ATtiny25/45/85 Automotive [DATASHEET]  
7598J–AVR–12/14  
X
X X X X  
X
Atmel Corporation  
1600 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 USA  
T: (+1)(408) 441.0311  
F: (+1)(408) 436.4200  
|
www.atmel.com  
© 2014 Atmel Corporation. / Rev.: 7598J–AVR–12/14  
Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, Enabling Unlimited Possibilities®, AVR®, AVR Studio®, and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel  
Corporation in U.S. and other countries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.  
DISCLAIMER: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right  
is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE  
ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES  
FOR LOSS AND PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS  
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this  
document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and products descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information  
contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended,  
authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.  
SAFETY-CRITICAL, MILITARY, AND AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS DISCLAIMER: Atmel products are not designed for and will not be used in connection with any applications where  
the failure of such products would reasonably be expected to result in significant personal injury or death (“Safety-Critical Applications”) without an Atmel officer's specific written  
consent. Safety-Critical Applications include, without limitation, life support devices and systems, equipment or systems for the operation of nuclear facilities and weapons systems.  
Atmel products are not designed nor intended for use in military or aerospace applications or environments unless specifically designated by Atmel as military-grade. Atmel products are  
not designed nor intended for use in automotive applications unless specifically designated by Atmel as automotive-grade.  

相关型号:

ATTINY25-15SZ

8-bit Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY25-15SZ

IC MCU 8BIT 2KB FLASH 8SOIC
MICROCHIP

ATTINY25-20MF

Atmel 8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY25-20MFR

Atmel 8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY25-20MU

8-bit Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY25-20MU

IC MCU 8BIT 2KB FLASH 20QFN
MICROCHIP

ATTINY25-20MU-SL383

Microcontroller
ATMEL

ATTINY25-20MUR

Atmel 8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY25-20MUR

IC MCU 8BIT 2KB FLASH 20QFN
MICROCHIP

ATTINY25-20PI

8-bit Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY25-20PU

8-bit Microcontroller with 2/4/8K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY25-20PU

IC MCU 8BIT 2KB FLASH 8DIP
MICROCHIP